CONTROLS for Your BMW X3 SUV Fourth Generation (2024-2025)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Safety switch 98  
Power windows 95  
Unlocking  
Locking  
2
6
7
Ventilation 279  
Seating comfort features  
Memory function 111  
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment button 108  
Opening and closing cargo area  
83  
5
Buttons for the central locking system 91  
8
Turn signal lever and light  
32  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Exterior lighting menu 155  
Audio, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Com-  
munication 6  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
153  
Voice control, BMW Intelligent  
Personal Assistant 56  
Low-beam headlights 156  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Driving lights automatic 156  
Adaptive lighting functions 159  
Exterior lighting off 156  
Turn signal 152  
Selection of configuration menus  
for instrument cluster and Head-  
up display 47  
Using selection lists 141  
Accessing and resetting trip data  
146  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 152  
Resetting the G-Meter values  
148  
9
Shift paddle, right and left 124  
Sport Boost function 126  
10 Steering wheel buttons, left  
Turn speed control systems on/off  
13 Wiper lever  
Wipers 161  
213  
Rain sensor 162  
Select speed control system 213  
Cleaning the windshield 163  
Rear wiper 164  
Store speed 213  
Adjusting the speed 213  
Clean the rear window 164  
11 Instrument cluster 47  
12 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Settings, instrument cluster 47  
14  
Horn, entire surface  
Settings for Head-up display 133  
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 110  
16 Unlocking the hood  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
33  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 49  
Hazard warning system 380  
Adjusting the volume  
Station/title forward  
Station/title back  
2
Defrost function 277  
Rear window defroster 278  
6
7
My Modes 127  
3
4
5
Ventilation 279  
Controller with buttons 54  
Parking assistance systems 238  
Vehicle settings menu 55  
Operating elements for entertainment sys-  
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communication 6  
8
9
Automatic Hold 131  
Parking brake 129  
Selector lever 121  
34  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
10  
Turning drive-ready state on/off  
119  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 382  
5
6
7
Interior lights 159  
2
3
Camera  
Interior camera 291  
Reading lights 160  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 168  
Interior lighting menu 55  
4
Glass sunroof 98  
35  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
Front camera  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
The front camera is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Camera behind the windshield  
Camera behind the windshield.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
The camera behind the windshield is located  
near the interior mirror.  
36  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Top view cameras  
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
The camera has overheated due to exces-  
sive temperatures and temporarily turned  
off.  
Rearview camera  
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-  
ately after vehicle delivery.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
The rearview camera is located above the li-  
cense-plate carrier.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
For the cameras to function correctly, the area  
around the cameras must be clean and free.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 388.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 389.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
37  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Front radar sensor  
Functional requirement of the radar  
sensors  
For the radar sensors to function correctly, the  
area around the radar sensors must be kept  
clean and free.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 388.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 389.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be re-  
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The front radar sensor is located in the radiator  
grille.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the front bumper.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
38  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors  
For the ultrasonic sensors to function correctly,  
the area around the ultrasonic sensors must  
be kept clean and free.  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 388.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 389.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the front bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For people with specific clothing, e.g., coat.  
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
▷
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
For elevated, protruding objects, e.g., wall  
ledges.  
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of the  
front and rear bumpers.  
39  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
In the case objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
▷
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, e.g., boxes.  
Low objects, e.g., curbs, that have already  
been displayed may enter the blind area of  
the sensors.  
▷
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
For bumps, e.g., speed bumps.  
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
▷
When the trailer hitch cover is not on  
straight.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
40  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Operating ele-  
ment  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Start/Stop button for  
turning on standby state  
or drive-ready state.  
Volume button for ac-  
tivating sleep mode  
or turning on standby  
state.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle will be  
in one of three operating states:  
Idle state  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Principle  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
The vehicle is in idle state until it is opened  
from the outside or after it is exited and locked.  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
The operating elements for manually setting  
the operating state are located at the bottom  
of the center console.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
41  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
all passengers must exit the vehicle.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
To activate/deactivate this function, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock/  
unlock" / "Turn off after opening door".  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
To turn on sleep mode man-  
ually, push and hold the volume  
button on the center console un-  
til all displays go out.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Deep sleep mode  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Principle  
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the  
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-  
hicle is stationary for several-week periods.  
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are  
limited to the essentials.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
The vehicle switches automatically to idle state  
in situations like the following:  
General information  
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than  
three months, some special measures are nec-  
essary. For more information, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Activating/deactivating deep sleep  
mode  
1. To enable deep sleep mode, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Deep sleep  
mode".  
Depending on the settings configured via  
iDrive, when one or both front doors are  
opened when exiting the vehicle after a  
drive.  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
42  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Deep sleep mode deactivates automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
Using the Start/Stop button  
To manually turn on standby state  
again with the Start/Stop button, push  
the Start/Stop button on the center  
console. The control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
Access to the vehicle  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If OFF is displayed on the instru-  
ment cluster, drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state is  
turned on.  
Press the button on the cargo area to access  
the vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep  
sleep mode remains on in this case.  
Drive-ready state  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
Standby state  
Principle  
If standby state is activated, most functions  
can be used while the vehicle is stationary. De-  
sired settings can be applied.  
General information  
Some vehicle functions can only be used with  
the drive-ready state switched on.  
The vehicle is in standby state after the front  
doors are opened from the outside.  
Safety information  
Turning on standby state manually  
DANGER  
General information  
Standby state can be reactivated manually if  
the vehicle has been set to idle state automati-  
cally.  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Via the volume button  
To manually turn on standby  
state again using the volume  
button on the center console,  
push the volume button. The  
control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
43  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
To turn on drive-ready state, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. On the center console, press the Start/Stop  
button.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Most of the indicator lights and warning lights  
on the instrument cluster illuminate for differ-  
ent lengths of time.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Gasoline engine  
The full drive power may not be available after  
the gasoline engine is started. This can take  
up to 30 seconds, depending on the engine.  
In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as  
usual.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Additional information:  
NOTICE  
Power gauge, refer to page 143.  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or  
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-  
cession can cause the starter to overheat.  
This also results in unburned or inadequately  
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-  
verter to overheat. There is a risk of property  
damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehi-  
cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid suc-  
cession.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If READY is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, the Auto Start/  
Stop function is ready to start  
the engine automatically.  
Information on the other displays on the instru-  
ment cluster is provided in the “Displays” sec-  
tion.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Additional information:  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 47.  
General information  
Drive-ready state is turned on/off us-  
ing the Start/Stop button on the center  
console.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
1. When the vehicle is stationary, press the  
brake.  
2. Engage the parking brake.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button on the center  
console.  
44  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
The READY indicator goes out and a signal  
tone sounds.  
The drive-ready state is switched off automat-  
ically if the driver's seat belt is not buckled  
when the driver's door is opened.  
45  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
BMW iDrive  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Input and display  
Entering letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be entered, e.g.,  
when inputting destinations.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
Controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Display and operating  
concept  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Principle  
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and operat-  
ing concept and includes a wide range of func-  
tions. Using BMW iDrive, you can input letters  
and characters when entering a destination or  
activate or deactivate functions.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
Confirm entry.  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a  
number.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.  
Via the Controller.  
Press and hold the icon: delete  
all letters or numbers.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Using the operating elements in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Entry comparison  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 47.  
When entering data from a database such as  
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed  
down for each character entered, with charac-  
ters being added as necessary.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon. To  
activate or deactivate the function, select the  
menu item.  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
46  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Meaning  
Instrument cluster  
Function is activated.  
Principle  
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperature as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
Function is deactivated.  
Functions can be activated or  
deactivated using the button  
on the control display. If the  
button is highlighted in color,  
the function is activated.  
The buttons on the steering wheel can be  
used to configure the layout of the instrument  
cluster and the contents of the central display  
area, e.g., trip data. Additional views can be  
set on the control display, e.g., a second actual  
speed.  
BMW Curved Display  
Safety information  
Principle  
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen  
display in the instrument panel that is curved  
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display  
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-  
er's side and the control display.  
Warning  
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Follow the instructions for cleaning the BMW  
Curved Display in the Care chapter.  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 391.  
Overview  
Overview  
1
Instrument cluster 47  
Control display 49  
2
Instrument cluster.  
47  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 135.  
Display ranges on the instrument  
cluster  
Operating elements on the steering  
wheel  
Operating Function  
element  
Display the menu bar on the in-  
strument cluster.  
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-  
tion up or down.  
1
Speedometer  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move selec-  
tion to left or right.  
2
Driver assistance systems 211  
Parking assistance systems 238  
Driver Attention Camera 205  
Check Control 135  
3
4
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Selector lever display 121  
Gear shift indicator 142  
Selection lists 141  
Configuring the layout  
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to  
the respective driving mode.  
Efficiency trainer 324  
Power gauge 143  
In Personal Mode drive mode, the layout in  
the instrument cluster can be individually con-  
figured and displayed.  
5
Tachometer 144  
6
7
Engine temperature 144  
Outside temperature 145  
Central display range 145  
Shift lights 145  
1.  
Press the Settings button on the  
steering wheel.  
8
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
9
My Modes drive mode 127  
10 Speed Limit Info 211  
Speed Limit Assistant 234  
11 Time 148  
2. "LAYOUT"  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
12 Fuel gauge 149  
Range 149  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
The positions of some displays may vary,  
e.g., the selector lever display.  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
Additional information:  
48  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Settings  
Warning  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury and risk of property damage. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Instrument  
cluster"  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Overview  
Control display  
Principle  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
The control display switches on automatically  
when it is needed for operation or when the  
vehicle is unlocked.  
The control display is located on the instru-  
ment panel above the center console.  
The control display can also be turned on/off  
manually.  
The main menu of BMW iDrive is divided into  
different areas, e.g., menu bar, status informa-  
tion, and widgets.  
Buttons on the control display  
When operating the control display, the but-  
tons on the control display illuminate.  
You can configure various settings such as the  
brightness of the control display.  
Button Function  
Go to previous menu.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Go to Media menu.  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Call up the Communication menu.  
Go to Navigation menu.  
Turning the control display on/off  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
49  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
Main menu  
The main menu can be opened from any  
menu.  
The control display can also be switched off  
manually.  
Climate menu  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Apps menu  
2. "Control display off"  
The Apps menu provides access to all apps  
and vehicle functions. You can use a filter to  
make it easier to find a specific app. The last  
selected filter is stored. To display the desired  
app, change the filter as necessary.  
Tap the control display to turn it on again.  
Main menu  
General information  
Apple CarPlay©  
The main menu on the control display is div-  
ided into different areas.  
The Apple CarPlay menu is displayed in  
the main menu depending on national-market  
version and connected function. Apple CarPlay  
enables the secure use of certain functions of a  
compatible Apple iPhone via iDrive.  
Overview  
Android Auto©  
The Android Auto menu is displayed in  
the main menu, depending on national-market  
version and associated function. Android Auto  
enables the secure use of certain functions of a  
compatible Android smartphone via iDrive.  
1
Widgets  
Widgets  
2
3
4
5
Status information  
Configuration bar for main display  
Temperature setting  
Menu bar  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as the navigation map.  
Widgets also serve as buttons and allow you to  
jump to the respective menu or most important  
functions.  
Menu bar  
Main display  
The main display shows real-time information  
and dynamic content such as the navigation  
map. This display also contains buttons and  
lets you jump to the desired menu.  
General information  
The menu bar may not be displayed when us-  
ing third-party apps. To display the menu bar  
again, swipe up from the lower edge of the  
control display or press a button.  
50  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Status information  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
General information  
Status information is displayed at the top of  
the control display in the form of icons. De-  
pending on the equipment and national-mar-  
ket version, different icons are available.  
Other status information  
Icon Meaning  
Sound output active.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
Destination guidance active.  
Go to quick access.  
Telephone status information  
Icon  
Meaning  
Active call.  
Signal strength.  
SIM card missing.  
Wireless charging active.  
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-  
vated.  
Entertainment status information  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Icon Meaning  
USB audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Smartphone audio.  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Time shift.  
1.  
Tap the main menu icon.  
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right  
side of the screen to the left.  
3. Select the desired main display.  
Quick access  
Wi-Fi.  
Certain functions and individual shortcuts can  
be opened via quick access.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Function Operation  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Show  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller up.  
Tap the icon at the top of the  
screen.  
Swipe from top to bottom on the  
Status information messages  
Icon  
Meaning  
Number of notifications.  
Check Control message.  
Message.  
Hide  
Swipe from the bottom up on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller down.  
51  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting shortcuts  
Shortcuts  
1. To delete shortcuts, swipe from top to bot-  
tom on the control display.  
Principle  
Shortcuts provide quick access to functions  
such as those that are frequently used. Short-  
cuts are opened via the quick link and can be  
defined individually. The following functions,  
for example, are defined as shortcuts:  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.  
3.  
Tap the icon for deleting the desired  
shortcut.  
Settings  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The radio stations.  
The navigation destinations.  
The phone numbers.  
The jump-ins to menus.  
The functions.  
Setting the brightness  
1. To adjust the brightness of the control dis-  
play, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Cockpit  
brightness" / "Brightness at night".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Saving shortcuts  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
1. Press and hold the desired function.  
2. "Add to shortcuts"  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
1. To enable/disable audio confirmation for  
the control display, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "System  
settings" / "Sound".  
Shortcuts can also be saved directly via the  
quick link.  
Selecting shortcuts  
2. Select the desired setting.  
1. To select shortcuts, swipe from top to bot-  
tom on the control display.  
System limits  
2. Select the desired shortcut.  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions  
are restored.  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Sorting shortcuts  
1. To sort shortcuts, swipe from top to bottom  
on the control display.  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut and  
move it to the desired position.  
Operation via control display  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
52  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers, do  
not use any objects.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
Function  
Operation  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. The adjustments can only be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
1. If necessary,  
tap the icon.  
2. Press and hold the widget.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
3. The following adjustments can be made:  
▷
Tap the add icon.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Contacts are listed in alphabetical order.  
A new widget can be added below the  
selected widget.  
To navigate to a desired initial letter in a list of  
more than 30 entries, select the letter on the  
letter bar and scroll up or down.  
▷
▷
Tap the delete icon.  
The widget is deleted.  
Tap the sort icon.  
Favorites are displayed at the top of the list.  
Entries with numbers are displayed at the end  
of the list.  
The widget can be moved to the desired  
position.  
Sorting apps  
The order of apps can be adjusted in the Apps  
menu.  
Controller  
Principle  
1. Open the Apps menu.  
The Controller can be used to select menu  
items and enter the settings. The buttons can  
be used to open the menus directly.  
2. Press and hold the desired app icon and  
move it to the desired position.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Overview  
To bring up the Context menu, press and hold  
the desired menu item.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
▷
"General help": The Integrated Owner's  
Manual opens.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": The menu item is de-  
fined as a shortcut.  
The Controller is located in the center console.  
53  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Buttons on the Controller  
Button  
Function  
Go to the main menu.  
Go to the Media menu.  
Go to the Phone menu.  
Go to the Navigation menu.  
Go to the previous menu.  
▷
Slide the Controller in four directions to  
switch between menus, for example.  
Operation  
▷
Turn the Controller to switch between  
menu options, for example.  
Operating via the Controller  
Opening the main menu  
Push the main menu button.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
option is highlighted.  
▷
Push the Controller to select a menu option,  
for example.  
2. Press the Controller.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
1.  
Push the main menu button.  
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the  
main display.  
54  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. Select the desired main display.  
Deleting an entry  
Icon Function  
Selecting a widget  
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.  
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-  
ber.  
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-  
sired widget is selected.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
3. Press the Controller.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
1. Select the desired menu option using the  
Controller.  
1. Quickly turn the Controller to the left or  
right.  
2. Press and hold the Controller.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
▷
"General help": The Integrated Owner's  
Manual opens.  
Direct access buttons  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": The menu item is de-  
fined as a shortcut.  
Principle  
Entering letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can only be entered  
when stationary.  
There are buttons for jumping directly to cer-  
tain functions in the vehicle. These buttons  
can be used to bring up the respective menu  
directly on the control display. Then continue  
operation via iDrive.  
Input  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
Overview  
The direct access buttons are located on the  
center console, between the steering wheel  
and driver’s door, and in the headliner.  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
Additional information:  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 58.  
55  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Button Function  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the Personal Assistant:  
Go to the Drive Settings menu on  
the center console.  
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-  
tween the steering wheel and driv-  
er’s door.  
▷
Download the corresponding language  
package before using the Personal Assis-  
tant for the first time.  
Go to the Interior Lighting menu on  
the headliner.  
▷
Commands must always be spoken in the  
selected system language.  
For the full range of functions, you must acti-  
vate or purchase the following functions:  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Online speech processing is enabled.  
All settings under Data privacy are enabled.  
The activation word is enabled.  
Principle  
Suggestions are activated.  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions.  
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.  
Corresponding ConnectedDrive services  
are purchased in the ConnectedDrive Store.  
The Personal Assistant provides proactive  
suggestions to make it easier to operate the  
vehicle. The Personal Assistant is available de-  
pending on national-market version. The func-  
tion scope and detection may vary depending  
on national-market version.  
▷
The BMW Digital Premium subscription has  
been purchased.  
Additional information:  
▷
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 58.  
You can use supported voice assistants from  
third parties in your vehicle after pairing your  
smartphone.  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 58.  
▷
▷
▷
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
Activation word, refer to page 57.  
Get suggestions, refer to page 58.  
You can configure various settings such as the  
suggestions from the Personal Assistant.  
The system includes special microphones on  
the driver side and the front passenger side.  
Activating the voice control system  
Using the voice activation system  
›...‹: In the Owner's Manual, commands that  
can be spoken are indicated by brackets.  
General information  
You can activate voice control as follows:  
When saying commands, note the following:  
▷
▷
Briefly press the microphone button  
on the steering wheel.  
Say the activation word.  
▷
Say the commands at a normal volume.  
Speaking directly into the microphone does  
not improve voice recognition.  
▷
Say the commands fluently and with nor-  
mal volume, emphasis, and speed.  
56  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
in addition to your preset activation word from  
BMW.  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Voice control" / "Other assistants".  
1.  
To activate voice control with the  
microphone button, briefly press the voice  
control button on the steering wheel.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
Canceling voice control  
You can cancel voice control as follows:  
2. Say the desired command.  
Activation word  
Principle  
▷
Press the voice control button on  
the steering wheel again.  
Saying the activation word will start the  
Personal Assistant: ›Hello BMW‹. The micro-  
phones on the driver's or front passenger's  
side are active with the following voice control,  
depending on where the activation word was  
spoken.  
▷
▷
▷
Say the following command: ›Cancel‹  
Slide the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
Possible voice commands  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence.  
Principle  
Voice commands can be used to give instruc-  
tions or ask questions, with the Personal As-  
sistant providing assistance.  
Enabling/disabling the activation word  
The activation word can be enabled and disa-  
bled.  
It is possible, for example, to call contacts, nav-  
igate to an address, change settings, or control  
vehicle functions, e.g., air conditioning, by voice  
command.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /  
"General" / "Activation with voice control".  
You can reach most content on the control dis-  
play, e.g., menu items or lists, using spoken  
commands.  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital voice  
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.  
Help for voice control  
You can say the following commands to get  
help with voice control:  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
▷
›Voice commands‹: Possible example com-  
mands are announced.  
Supported voice assistants can be used in the  
vehicle after you have connected your smart-  
phone.  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: In-  
formation on how voice control operates is  
announced.  
The activation word for voice assistants from  
associated third-party providers can be used  
▷
›Help‹: Tips and example commands for  
voice control are announced.  
57  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Sample commands  
Managing language packages  
The following voice commands serve as exam-  
ples.  
1. To manage language packages, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /  
"Language".  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
›Increase volume‹ or ›Decrease volume‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›What is my remaining range‹  
›Sport mode‹  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Suggestions  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-  
vidual suggestions. Suggestions can be ena-  
bled or disabled. Suggestions can be custom-  
ized, e.g., which categories suggestions are  
based on or whether to emit a signal tone.  
Additional example commands can be dis-  
played on the control display.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Personal Assistant" / "Example  
commands".  
1. To configure the settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /  
"Suggestions".  
Sample commands are displayed in the BMW  
Intelligent Personal Assistant widget.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Menu items  
Online speech processing  
The Personal Assistant can open menu items  
directly. Say the menu items as they are dis-  
played on the control display. You do not have  
to follow the order of the menu items when  
speaking them out loud.  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
Online speech processing is not available in all  
languages. Online voice processing can be de-  
activated depending on national-market ver-  
sion.  
1. Activate voice control.  
2. ›Media‹  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the  
control display.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /  
"General" / "Online speech processing".  
Settings  
Configuring the visualization  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can  
be set.  
Setting the system language  
You must set a system language that is sup-  
ported by the Personal Assistant. A language  
package can be downloaded.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Personal Assistant" /  
"Settings" / "General" / "Visualization".  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Language".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
58  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party  
voice control can be activated by pressing and  
holding the microphone button on the steering  
wheel.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Principle  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Voice control".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
Functional requirements  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the vehicle.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
1. To activate Amazon Alexa Car Integration,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Alexa".  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
1.  
Press and hold the voice control  
button on the steering wheel for approx.  
3 seconds.  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display.  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
System limits  
2.  
Press the voice control button on  
the steering wheel to cancel the smart-  
phone voice control.  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle. This also applies to  
safety functions and systems.  
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-  
dows closed.  
59  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
The following information sources can also be  
used:  
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
A poor data connection influences the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
the Search.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
Principle  
Various connection modes are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion mode to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and desired function.  
Overview  
General information  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and suitable connection modes for them.  
The functions available depend on the vehicle  
equipment and connected mobile device.  
Detailed information on the functions and con-  
nection modes is provided in the following me-  
dia from the Owner's Manual under the speci-  
fied keyword:  
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.  
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
Function  
Connection mode  
Icon  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Using phone functions via iDrive.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile device.  
Keyword: audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Play music from a USB stick.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
USB port, refer to page 288.  
60  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Function  
Connection mode  
Calling without a mobile phone.  
Personal eSIM.  
Keyword: calling with the Personal  
eSIM.  
Keyword: Personal eSIM.  
Data exchange between mobile de-  
vice and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.  
hotspot.  
Keyword: personal hotspot.  
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and  
via voice control.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay.  
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
voice control.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Android Auto.  
Charge USB device.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
USB port, refer to page 288.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
USB port, refer to page 288.  
61  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
Vehicle features and options  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Functional requirements  
The following requirements apply for Remote  
Software Upgrade:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
▷
▷
The vehicle has mobile network reception.  
Principle  
Consent to send corresponding data has  
been granted in the BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade settings.  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Settings  
To bring up the Remote Software Updates set-  
tings, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote  
Software Upgrade" / "Settings".  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Additional information:  
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
Safety information  
Search for an upgrade  
Warning  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Automatic search  
The vehicle checks regularly for Remote Soft-  
ware Upgrades in the background.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Manual search  
1. To search manually for a Remote Software  
Upgrade, go through the menu as follows:  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
62  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
Apps menu / "All" / "System settings" /  
"Remote Software Upgrade" / "Search for  
upgrade".  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, Communication.  
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Information about the version  
Principle  
Download of an upgrade  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been successfully  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Automatic download  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
Via My BMW App  
If a Remote Software Upgrade is available, in-  
formation about the new software version is  
provided on the My BMW App.  
Displaying information  
Information on the Remote Software Upgrade  
can be shown on the vehicle's control display  
or viewed online in the ConnectedDrive cus-  
tomer portal:  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
Data can then be sent from the mobile device  
to the vehicle.  
1. To display information in the vehicle,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote  
Software Upgrade".  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
2.  
▷
The currently installed version is dis-  
played.  
You do not need to be present in the vehicle to  
download the data to a mobile device.  
▷
Display new available version:  
"Version info"  
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW  
App on your smartphone.  
3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via  
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
To view the information in the ConnectedDrive  
customer portal, visit the following website:  
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-  
bile device to the vehicle both while driving  
and when stopped. Depending on the size  
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive  
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.  
 
Installing the upgrade  
What to know before upgrading  
Before installing an upgrade, note the follow-  
ing:  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Additional information:  
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of software  
63  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
changes, e.g., performance increases not  
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
Preparing the vehicle  
The vehicle must be prepared for the Remote  
Software Upgrade as follows:  
▷
The installation may be interrupted if there  
are modifications to the vehicle's electrical  
system, e.g., to control units, which were  
not made by the vehicle manufacturer.  
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
▷
Make sure that the vehicle has mobile net-  
work reception so that a fault message can  
be sent to the vehicle manufacturer, e.g., if  
the installation is canceled.  
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
The installation may take around 20 to  
30 minutes.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.  
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.  
Close the glass sunroof.  
Close the cargo area.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
Disconnect devices that consume power,  
e.g., mobile phones.  
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
▷
▷
Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.  
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.  
▷
▷
Turn off the exterior lighting.  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
Remove any devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
Install the upgrade immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all  
prerequisites have been met.  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote  
Software Upgrade" / "Let's get started".  
Pay attention to any instructions given on the  
control display regarding additional require-  
ments.  
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites  
automatically. Observe the information on the  
control display.  
Installing an upgrade with the timer  
Once the drive is complete, the timer can be  
used to automatically install the upgrade at a  
preset time, e.g., during the night. It may be  
helpful to install the upgrade at a later time in  
order to meet functional requirements, e.g., to  
allow the engine to cool sufficiently.  
If the requirements are not met, e.g., suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
If all prerequisites are met, you can also start  
the upgrade installation via the My BMW App.  
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote  
Software Upgrade".  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after longer trips.  
2. Select the desired settings.  
64  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
The installation starts automatically when:  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have  
been established correctly.  
Purchased services, e.g., Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services, are au-  
tomatically reactivated the next time the vehi-  
cle is driven.  
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the  
time of installation.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
If the vehicle has been stationary for some  
time, it may be necessary to recharge the vehi-  
cle battery by going for a long drive.  
Installing via the My BMW App  
Once all preparations are complete and all re-  
quirements are met, the upgrade installation  
can also be started using the My BMW App  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-  
stallation can be started remotely. It is not nec-  
essary to be present in the vehicle.  
Malfunction  
If the Remote Software Upgrade system may  
not be operational, follow the instructions  
given on the control display or My BMW App.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
It may be helpful to install the upgrade at a  
later time so that all functional requirements  
are met, e.g., to allow the engine to cool suffi-  
ciently.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
▷
▷
Hazard warning flashers.  
After a software update in the vehicle  
Central locking system and Comfort Access,  
as applicable.  
After a vehicle software update, for example,  
via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated  
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the  
latest information, depending on the national-  
market version.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking light.  
Horn.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
Before setting off, make sure that the  
Integrated Owner's Manual is available and  
up-to-date.  
Power windows.  
Glass sunroof.  
Locking the tank flap.  
Operating the tailgate or trunk lid.  
Exit warning if needed.  
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window  
may no longer close completely.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
65  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following  
data is deleted, for example:  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Data protection  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Data transfer  
Digital key.  
Principle  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-  
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-  
Drive customer portal so that remote functions  
can no longer be used.  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When data transfer is deactivated,  
the respective service cannot be used.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
when deleting personal data in the vehicle:  
Settings  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
▷
Data can only be deleted while the vehicle  
is stationary.  
1. To configure the settings, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Data  
privacy".  
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Personal data in the vehicle  
Principle  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
Additional information:  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 66.  
Depending on use, your vehicle stores per-  
sonal data such as saved radio stations. This  
personal data can be permanently deleted us-  
ing iDrive.  
Reset vehicle data  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
66  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
switched off. Individual settings can only be  
deleted while the vehicle is stationary. The ve-  
hicle key must be in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.  
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are  
only possible when the vehicle has cellular  
network reception.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Reset vehicle  
data" / "Reset".  
If the synchronization of settings has been en-  
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal  
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.  
Welcome window  
The welcome window appears on the control  
display after the vehicle is unlocked. The type  
of welcome depends on the following require-  
ments:  
BMW ID  
▷
No BMW ID is saved to the vehicle:  
Principle  
The welcome is neutral. These profiles are  
provided to use the vehicle without a BMW  
ID. A new BMW ID can be added.  
In BMW ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW  
ID is the personal login for all relevant offers  
from the BMW brand. The BMW ID can be  
used to save personal vehicle settings to a  
profile as well as to apply these settings.  
▷
The vehicle key or digital key has not been  
assigned to a BMW ID:  
The welcome is neutral. Saved profiles are  
shown for selection. A new BMW ID can be  
added.  
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs. If a ve-  
hicle is used by several people, each person  
can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. Addi-  
tional profiles can be used to operate the vehi-  
cle without a BMW ID, e.g., the guest profile.  
▷
A BMW ID has been assigned to the vehicle  
key or digital key:  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. Available profiles are  
shown for selection. A new BMW ID can be  
added.  
The BMW ID must be registered once. Regis-  
tration can be done on the My BMW App, in  
the ConnectedDrive customer portal, or at an  
authorized service center.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate a  
BMW ID as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.  
To do so, a vehicle key or digital key must be  
linked to the BMW ID.  
Adding the BMW ID  
1.  
To add a BMW ID, tap the BMW ID icon  
or profile picture on the status bar.  
2.  
▷
The guest profile is active:  
"Guest" / "Add profile".  
The driver profile is active:  
"Log in with BMW ID".  
Many saved settings can be synchronized with  
the BMW Cloud. This makes these settings  
available in any vehicle where the same BMW  
ID is used to log in.  
▷
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the BMW ID:  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
If the My BMW App is installed on the  
smartphone and the BMW ID saved to it,  
67  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
the BMW ID is automatically transferred to  
the vehicle.  
In rare cases, the use of My BMW app func-  
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More  
information is shown on the control display.  
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a new  
BMW ID can be registered.  
Primary user  
5. Change additional settings as necessary,  
e.g., automatic driver recognition.  
The primary user is the person who first adds  
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the  
vehicle to the My BMW app. Alternatively, the  
primary user can be specified by an authorized  
service center.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW  
App.  
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by  
an authorized service center and added to the  
vehicle.  
The primary user has access to the following  
settings, for example:  
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.  
Confirming a BMW ID  
If the BMW ID was registered by the author-  
ized service center and added to the vehicle,  
the BMW ID must be confirmed in the vehicle.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other BMW ID.  
▷
▷
Configuring vehicle-wide data protection  
settings.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
Creating the main digital key.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
Additional information:  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
It may be necessary to log in again with the  
BMW ID.  
Personalized settings  
Automatic driver recognition  
Principle  
This icon is displayed on the status bar  
and indicates when it is necessary to login  
again.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate a  
BMW ID as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.  
To do so, a vehicle key or digital key must be  
assigned to the BMW ID. After unlocking, the  
BMW ID can be changed.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
Another login will be attempted. Once suc-  
cessfully logged in, all functions can be used  
again.  
If driver recognition has been configured, auto-  
matic activation of the BMW ID is triggered by  
the following:  
My BMW app  
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,  
the vehicle is automatically added to the My  
BMW app. The My BMW App provides numer-  
ous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user  
management.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using a door han-  
dle. The assigned vehicle key or the as-  
signed digital key must be carried with you.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center can  
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,  
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the  
control display in the corresponding vehicle.  
▷
By unlocking automatically when ap-  
proaching the vehicle. The assigned vehicle  
key or the assigned digital key must be car-  
68  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
ried with you. Depending on the country, it  
may not be possible to recognize the digital  
key.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures.  
If multiple vehicle keys or digital keys are lo-  
cated near the vehicle, BMW IDs are activated  
according to the following priority:  
1.  
To add a profile picture, tap the  
BMW ID icon or profile picture on the status  
bar.  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
activation of the assigned BMW ID.  
2. Select the desired BMW ID.  
3. "Profile settings"  
▷
If a vehicle key and digital key are detected  
at the same time, the digital key triggers  
activation of the assigned BMW ID.  
4. "My BMW ID"  
5. "Picture"  
▷
The BMW ID of the key last detected on the  
driver’s door is activated.  
6. Select the desired profile picture.  
The profile picture from the My BMW App pro-  
file can be applied to BMW IDs. To do so,  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud must be  
enabled in the settings. Once a profile picture  
is taken from the My BMW App, the default  
profile images can only be used if the profile  
picture on the My BMW App is deleted or syn-  
chronization is disabled.  
If the BMW ID could not be detected when the  
vehicle was unlocked, select the BMW ID on  
the welcome window.  
Setting/adjusting automatic driver recognition  
1.  
To set or adjust automatic driver recog-  
nition, tap the BMW ID icon or profile image  
on the status bar.  
Setting synchronization  
2. "Profile settings"  
3. "Driver recognition"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Principle  
If synchronization is on, settings from the fol-  
lowing areas, for example, are synchronized:  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile image.  
A vehicle key assigned to a BMW ID can be  
used to view or change the stored personal  
settings.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home  
address, or map settings.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
If driver recognition has been configured for a  
vehicle key, reset these settings before giving  
the vehicle key to another person.  
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-  
guage, or units.  
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to  
transfer a digital key to permit other persons  
the use of your own vehicle.  
The Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions  
or the activation word.  
Additional information:  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling  
and pathway lighting.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when logging in for the first time:  
69  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Seat and climate comfort functions, e.g.,  
driver’s seat position or temperature set-  
ting.  
Deleting a BMW ID  
1.  
To delete a BMW ID, tap the BMW ID  
icon or profile picture on the status bar.  
Privacy menu.  
2. "Profile settings"  
3. "Manage profiles"  
Turning synchronization on/off  
4.  
Tap the delete icon for the desired  
BMW ID.  
When deleting BMW IDs, note the following:  
1.  
To enable/disable settings synchroni-  
zation, tap the BMW ID icon or profile pic-  
ture on the status bar.  
▷
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle  
causes the vehicle to be removed from the  
My BMW App. If the BMW ID has been  
synchronized with the BMW Cloud, the data  
stored on the BMW Cloud is retained after  
the BMW ID is deleted. If the currently ac-  
tive BMW ID is removed, another profile  
must be selected.  
2. "Profile settings"  
3. "My BMW ID"  
4. "Synchronize BMW ID"  
In addition, the profile picture can be set if it  
has not been adopted from the My BMW App.  
Configuring PIN protection  
Saved BMW IDs can be selected by every ve-  
hicle user. If you want to prevent the settings  
from being changed or the data from being  
viewed for a BMW ID, you can configure PIN  
protection.  
▷
▷
▷
Deleting the primary user's BMW ID resets  
the vehicle to factory settings. The vehicle  
is removed from each user’s My BMW App,  
and all BMW IDs are removed from the ve-  
hicle.  
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App  
removes the corresponding BMW ID from  
the vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchron-  
ized with the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data  
stored in the BMW Cloud will be retained.  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or profile picture  
on the status bar.  
2. Select the desired BMW ID.  
3. "Profile settings"  
4. "Lock screen"  
If the vehicle is removed from the primary  
user’s My BMW App, it will also be removed  
from the My BMW Apps of all users. The  
corresponding BMW IDs are removed from  
the vehicle.  
5. Enter the desired PIN.  
Profile management  
Editing profiles  
The profile can be changed at any time.  
Additional profiles  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or profile picture  
on the status bar.  
Principle  
Additional profiles can be used to operate the  
vehicle without a BMW ID.  
2. "Change profile"  
3. Select the desired BMW ID or profile.  
4. If necessary, enter a PIN.  
Driver profile  
"Driver ": If no BMW ID is available, vehicle  
settings can be saved to this profile.  
The BMW ID is activated and associated set-  
tings are loaded.  
This profile is subject to the following restric-  
tions, among others:  
70  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Driver cannot be detected automatically.  
stored for a system that is not available, or  
available in a non-compatible version, in other  
vehicles.  
The name and profile image cannot be  
changed.  
▷
▷
There is no synchronization with the BMW  
Cloud.  
Driver profiles  
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
Principle  
The profile, and the settings saved to it, can be  
transferred to a BMW ID. The BMW ID is then  
displayed instead of the profile.  
Driver profiles can be used in countries where  
BMW ConnectedDrive is not available in order  
to save and activate personal vehicle settings  
in the vehicle.  
Guest profile  
"Guest": This profile can be used to oper-  
ate the vehicle without changing the settings  
saved for other profiles.  
Your vehicle can save up to seven driver pro-  
files. If a vehicle is used by several people,  
each person can use their own driver profile  
in the vehicle. The guest driver profile can be  
used when driving the vehicle without a driver  
profile.  
This profile is subject to the following restric-  
tions, among others:  
▷
▷
Changed settings are not saved.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate a  
driver profile as soon as the vehicle is un-  
locked. To do so, a vehicle key must be linked  
to the driver profile.  
It is not possible to specify automatic driver  
recognition or assign a PIN.  
▷
▷
▷
The name and profile image cannot be  
changed.  
Functional requirement  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a driver profile.  
There is no synchronization with the BMW  
Cloud.  
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
Welcome window  
A welcome window appears on the control dis-  
play after the vehicle is unlocked. The type of  
the welcome depends on the following prereq-  
uisites:  
System limits  
It may not be possible to clearly identify the  
driver using the vehicle key or digital key in the  
following situations, for example:  
▷
No driver profile is saved to the vehicle:  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
The welcome is neutral. A new driver profile  
can be added.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys, to which a BMW ID is assigned,  
are located outside the driver's side of the  
vehicle.  
▷
Vehicle key has not been assigned to a  
driver profile:  
The welcome is neutral. Saved driver pro-  
files are shown for selection. A new driver  
profile can be added.  
▷
If the vehicle was unlocked using the My  
BMW App.  
▷
A driver profile has been assigned to the  
vehicle key:  
The use of personal settings that are stored for  
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-  
cal limitations. For example, settings may be  
71  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The available driver  
profiles are shown for selection. A new  
driver profile can be added.  
▷
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
By unlocking the vehicle using a door han-  
dle. The assigned vehicle key or the as-  
signed digital key must be carried with you.  
Driver profile, driver  
▷
By unlocking automatically when ap-  
proaching the vehicle. The assigned vehicle  
key or the assigned digital key must be car-  
ried with you. Depending on the country, it  
may not be possible to recognize the digital  
key.  
"Driver": A driver profile allows the driver to  
save individual vehicle settings as well as cre-  
ate a name for this profile and select a profile  
image.  
Driver profile, guest  
"Guest": This driver profile can be used to op-  
erate the vehicle without changing the settings  
saved for other driver profiles.  
If multiple vehicle keys or digital keys are lo-  
cated near the vehicle, BMW IDs are activated  
according to the following priority:  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
activation of the assigned BMW ID.  
This profile is subject to the following restric-  
tions, among others:  
▷
If a vehicle key and digital key are detected  
at the same time, the digital key triggers  
activation of the assigned BMW ID.  
▷
▷
Changed settings are not saved.  
It is not possible to specify automatic driver  
recognition or assign a PIN.  
▷
The BMW ID of the key last detected on the  
driver’s door is activated.  
▷
The name and profile image cannot be  
changed.  
If the BMW ID could not be detected when the  
vehicle was unlocked, select the BMW ID on  
the welcome window.  
Adding a driver profile  
1.  
To add a driver profile, tap the driver  
profile icon or profile picture on the status  
bar.  
Setting/adjusting automatic driver recognition  
1.  
To set or adjust automatic driver recog-  
nition, tap the BMW ID icon or profile image  
on the status bar.  
2. "Add profile"  
3. Change additional settings as necessary,  
e.g., automatic driver recognition.  
2. "Profile settings"  
3. "Driver recognition"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Personalized settings  
Automatic driver recognition  
Principle  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
A vehicle key assigned to a driver profile can  
be used to view or change saved personal set-  
tings.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate a  
driver profile as soon as the vehicle is un-  
locked. To do so, a vehicle key must be as-  
signed to the driver profile.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-  
sons, any assigned driver detection should be  
canceled.  
If driver recognition has been configured, auto-  
matic activation of the BMW ID is triggered by  
the following:  
You can configure driver recognition in the  
driver profile settings.  
72  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
Configuring PIN protection  
Once saved, driver profiles can be selected by  
every user of the vehicle. If you want to prevent  
settings from being changed or data from be-  
ing viewed for a driver profile, it is possible to  
set PIN protection.  
If multiple vehicle keys with assigned driver  
profiles are located on the driver's side of  
the vehicle.  
1.  
Tap the driver profile icon or profile pic-  
ture on the status bar.  
2. Select the desired driver profile.  
3. "Profile settings"  
4. "Lock screen"  
5. Enter the desired PIN.  
Profile management  
Changing driver profiles  
The driver profile can be changed at any time.  
1.  
Tap the driver profile icon or profile pic-  
ture on the status bar.  
2. "Change profile"  
3. Select the desired driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter a PIN.  
The driver profile is activated and associated  
settings are loaded.  
Deleting the driver profile  
1.  
To delete a driver profile, tap the driver  
profile icon or profile picture on the status  
bar.  
2. "Profile settings"  
3. "Manage profiles"  
4.  
Tap the icon to delete the desired driver  
profile.  
System limits  
It may not be possible to clearly identify the  
driver using the vehicle key in the following sit-  
uations, for example:  
73  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
Vehicle key  
Principle  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery. If the vehicle key's battery is discharged,  
the vehicle key will not be detected. In this  
case, drive-ready state can be turned on by  
emergency detection of the vehicle key.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
Unlock.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-  
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Lock.  
Pre-conditioning, refer to page 282.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Open the cargo area.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Panic mode.  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 158.  
Safety information  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
74  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
To replace the vehicle key battery, proceed as  
follows:  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward, then re-  
move it from the side.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID  
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle  
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can  
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file.  
Replacing the battery  
NOTICE  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of property damage. Always replace the dis-  
charged battery with a battery with the same  
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-  
cation.  
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-  
cle key to the side.  
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-  
ing.  
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-  
tive terminal facing down.  
75  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle  
key.  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
Removing the integrated key  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open  
side of the vehicle key.  
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It  
is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-  
teries together with household waste.  
Integrated key  
Principle  
The integrated key is built into the vehicle key.  
If the electrical system malfunctions, the vehi-  
cle can be unlocked and locked manually using  
the integrated key.  
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-  
ment.  
Safety information  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
76  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Press the central locking button to unlock  
all doors.  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger  
door.  
5. With the integrated key, close and lock the  
front passenger door using the side door  
lock.  
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
If vehicle is de-energized:  
1. With the integrated key, close and lock all  
doors, except the driver's door, using the  
side door lock.  
3. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
4. Open the driver's door.  
5. Press the central locking button to unlock  
the other doors.  
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door  
opener of the other doors from the inside.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
2. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's  
side and close the front passenger door.  
77  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Using the integrated key, lock the driver's  
door lock clockwise.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. To turn on drive-ready state via emergency  
detection of the vehicle key, hold the back  
of the vehicle key to the marking on the  
steering column. Pay attention to the dis-  
play in the instrument cluster.  
4. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
5. Close the driver's door.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
2.  
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
Slightly change the position of the vehi-  
cle key and repeat the procedure.  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
If the doors are manually locked from the in-  
side, the alarm system is not activated.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Principle  
If the vehicle key's battery is discharged, the  
vehicle key will not be detected. In this case,  
drive-ready state can be turned on by emer-  
gency detection of the vehicle key.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
78  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-  
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready  
state.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Access to vehicle interior  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Principle  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
The vehicle can be unlocked/locked as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With the vehicle key.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Using the door handle.  
With the Key Card.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
With the BMW Digital Key.  
Hands-free unlocking/locking  
Safety information  
Warning  
Actions during unlocking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-  
cle:  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle  
will be unlocked.  
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.  
Warning  
The welcome light can be turned on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
79  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned  
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver  
profile will be activated.  
With the vehicle key  
Unlocking the vehicle  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
To unlock the vehicle using the vehicle  
key, press the unlock button on the ve-  
hicle key.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in  
exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have  
been unlocked due to the settings in place,  
press the button on the vehicle key again to  
unlock the other vehicle access points.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using  
the button inside the vehicle, they will not  
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.  
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
Additional information:  
Locking the vehicle  
1. To lock the vehicle using the vehicle key,  
close the driver’s door.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 92.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 157.  
BMW ID, refer to page 67.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 71.  
2.  
Press the lock button on the vehicle  
key.  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:  
On the door handle  
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
Principle  
The vehicle can be accessed without using the  
vehicle key.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-  
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically  
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers  
are switched on.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the cargo area, and the fuel filler  
flap are locked.  
Depending on national-market version, the ve-  
hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the  
door handle using a compatible smartphone  
and digital key.  
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This  
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-  
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.  
Additional information:  
▷
The alarm system is switched on.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be  
turned off using the Start/Stop button.  
Functional requirements  
To get inside the vehicle using the door han-  
dle, the following functional requirements must  
be met:  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 92.  
80  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
hold it there without reaching into the re-  
cessed grip.  
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to unlock and lock using the digital  
key.  
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
Unlocking the vehicle using the door  
handle  
Malfunction  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
To unlock the vehicle using the door handle,  
reach into the recessed grip on one of the front  
doors.  
Principle  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
Locking the vehicle with the door  
handle  
1. To lock the vehicle using the door handle,  
close the driver’s door.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear  
of the vehicle.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
2. Carry the vehicle key with you.  
Touch the grooved surface on the closed  
front door handle for approx. 1 second and  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of  
the vehicle.  
Automatic unlocking and locking must be acti-  
vated in the settings.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-  
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital  
81  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to  
do so.  
With the Key Card  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-  
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used  
to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
If someone is detected on a seat while locking  
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 87.  
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Additional information:  
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the  
Key Card  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
Actions during unlocking  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,  
note the following:  
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only  
unlock when the driver is within the driver's  
door unlocking zone.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 92.  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
Functional requirements  
To unlock/lock the vehicle hands-free, the fol-  
lowing functional requirements must be met:  
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the digital key.  
With the BMW Digital Key  
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
Principle  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, a digital key can be installed  
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-  
lock and lock the vehicle.  
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
Settings, refer to page 92.  
82  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Inside the vehicle.  
Hands-free opening/closing.  
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the  
BMW Digital Key  
General information  
The cargo area will be opened to the config-  
ured opening height.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is  
clear during opening and closing.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-  
sition of the near field communication antenna  
depends on the smartphone model.  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
Warning  
The tailgate swings back and up when it  
opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the tailgate is clear during opening  
and closing.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
▷
The My BMW App Remote Services include  
options to lock and unlock a vehicle, among  
other things.  
Warning  
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the  
windows and heating elements while driving.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of property  
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that  
pointed objects do not hit the windows.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract, and the My BMW App must  
be installed on your smartphone.  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
With the vehicle key  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Access to the cargo area  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the following settings can be  
changed:  
The cargo area can be opened/closed as fol-  
lows:  
▷
▷
With the vehicle key.  
In the cargo area.  
83  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle  
key also unlocks the doors.  
Functional requirements  
To access the cargo area using the cargo area,  
the following functional requirements must be  
met:  
Before unlocking the cargo area with the  
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
Functional requirements  
To access the cargo area using the vehicle key,  
the following functional requirements must be  
met:  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to detect the digital key.  
▷
To open the cargo area with the vehicle  
key, the trailer power socket must not be  
occupied.  
Opening the cargo area  
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged  
to open the cargo area with the vehicle key.  
You must enable the setting for opening  
with the vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 92.  
The trunk can be opened as follows:  
Opening the cargo area  
▷
Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on  
the trunk.  
On the vehicle key, press and hold the  
button for opening/closing the cargo  
area for approx. 1 second.  
▷
With Comfort Access: Carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the trunk.  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
On the cargo area  
Closing the cargo area  
General information  
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be  
accessed without activating the vehicle key.  
The key is automatically detected near the ve-  
hicle.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
compatible smartphones with a digital key are  
also detected automatically. In this case, the  
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.  
Additional information:  
The cargo area can be closed as follows:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
▷
On the cargo area, press the open/  
close button.  
▷
On the cargo area, press the lock  
button.  
84  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The vehicle is locked after closing the cargo  
area. To do so, the driver's door must be  
closed and the vehicle key must be outside  
of the vehicle near the cargo area.  
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
▷
Pull the tailgate down slightly. The tailgate  
closes automatically.  
Pressing the button again continues the  
opening process.  
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the  
driver's door. Pressing again continues the  
opening procedure.  
In the interior  
Functional requirements  
To open the cargo area using the button in-  
side, the trailer power socket must not be oc-  
cupied.  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
The closing process stops in the following sit-  
uations:  
The vehicle key or digital key must be located  
inside the vehicle in order to close the cargo  
area using the button in the vehicle interior.  
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-  
ment.  
▷
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever po-  
sition P must be engaged before the tailgate  
can be opened using the button in the vehicle  
interior.  
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
Opening the cargo area  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing it again opens the cargo area  
again.  
To open the cargo area, press the  
open/close button for the cargo area  
on the driver's door.  
By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
Closing the cargo area  
To open the cargo area, pull and hold  
the open/close button for the cargo  
area on the driver's door.  
Touchless opening and closing of  
the cargo area  
An acoustic signal sounds before the cargo  
area is closed.  
Principle  
Touchless opening and closing of the cargo  
area is possible when carrying the vehicle key  
on your person.  
Interruption of the opening  
procedure  
The opening process stops in the following sit-  
uations:  
Sensors detect specific foot movements near  
the center of the trunk, and the trunk opens or  
closes.  
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
85  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the  
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if  
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot  
movement is detected.  
Hands-free opening of the trunk  
1. To open the trunk hands-free, walk behind  
the vehicle with the vehicle key, holding it  
in the middle at the rear of the vehicle, ap-  
proximately one arm’s length away.  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
2. Move your foot under the vehicle in the  
driving direction and pull it back immedi-  
ately. During these movements, the leg  
must pass through the range of the sensor.  
If contactless opening is used for the cargo  
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Depending on national-market version, con-  
tactless opening of the cargo area is also pos-  
sible for compatible smartphones with a Digital  
Key.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-  
ing system flashes.  
With hands-free opening of the cargo area,  
there may be unintentional contact with vehi-  
cle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is  
a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make  
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch  
the vehicle.  
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-  
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will  
close the cargo area again.  
Hands-free closing of the trunk  
To close the trunk hands-free, move your foot,  
while carrying the vehicle key on you, in the  
same way as for opening the trunk.  
Functional requirements  
To open/close the trunk hands-free, the fol-  
lowing functional requirements must be met:  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.  
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-  
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open  
the cargo area again.  
Contactless opening and closing of the  
trunk must be activated in the settings.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to open and close the cargo area  
contactlessly using the Digital Key.  
System limits  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external conditions:  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
▷
The trailer power socket must be unoccu-  
pied.  
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
▷
No trailer hitches should be mounted.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 92.  
86  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
Movement in range of the sensors may cause  
the trunk to open or close unintentionally, e.g.,  
when objects are lifted quickly in the vehicle  
rear or due to the moving brushes in a car  
wash. To prevent such unintended opening of  
the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle  
key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the  
vehicle.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Malfunction  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is  
a risk of property damage. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Warning  
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate,  
it can release itself unexpectedly from the  
blocking. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Do not operate the tail-  
gate manually if it is blocked. Have the vehi-  
cle checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
In the event of an electrical malfunction in the  
automatic tailgate, operate the unlocked tail-  
gate slowly with a smooth motion by hand.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly  
only. Closing occurs automatically.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
87  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Activating Key Card  
1. To turn on drive-ready state with the Key  
Card, place the activated Key Card in the  
center of the tray.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key  
Card can be removed from the tray.  
Malfunction  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
1. To activate the Key Card, place the Key  
Card in the center of the tray on the center  
console.  
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
BMW Digital Key  
Deactivating Key Card  
Principle  
To deactivate the Key Card, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Vehicle key" / "Key Card" / "Deactivate Key  
Card".  
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and  
start your vehicle using a digital key.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW  
app can be used to check if the smartphone  
and vehicle are compatible and which func-  
tions are supported.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with  
the activated Key Card.  
Additional information:  
Each vehicle can be provided with a main dig-  
ital key. Additional digital keys can be shared  
and then deleted.  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 79.  
Turning on drive-ready state with  
the Key Card  
General information  
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality  
depend on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is  
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the  
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be  
given to another person, they can be given the  
88  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,  
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.  
Sharing digital keys  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-  
ice appointment.  
General information  
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID, refer to page 67.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 71.  
Key Card, refer to page 87.  
More information is available online:  
 
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements must be  
met for BMW Digital Key:  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
Limiting the range of functions  
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-  
ited before handing it over. For example, you  
can disable restrictions for driving stability con-  
trol systems and reduce the engine power be-  
fore giving your digital key to a novice driver.  
For more information, refer to the Connected-  
Drive customer portal and the My BMW App.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the digital key.  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
Proof of authorization can be started via the  
My BMW App or using the activation code in  
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,  
the Wallet app.  
Deleting digital keys  
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-  
cle to be enabled.  
General information  
To enable, follow the instructions given on the  
Digital Key menu, BMW app, or control display.  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
89  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
To reactivate the main digital key, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Vehicle key" / "Digital Key" / "Reset function".  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted from the  
smartphone or via iDrive.  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-  
lows:  
Deleting a shared key  
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-  
phone with the main digital key, via the smart-  
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.  
▷
▷
Using the door handle.  
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-  
tional-market version, the vehicle can be  
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-  
tion.  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
BMW Digital Key availability and function-  
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version.  
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared  
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 79.  
Deletion via iDrive  
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be  
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the  
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone  
tray.  
Turning on drive-ready state with  
the BMW Digital Key  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle key" / "Digital  
Key".  
2. If necessary, select the digital key.  
3. "Delete key"  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
1. To turn on drive-ready state with the BMW  
Digital Key, place the smartphone in the  
center of the tray.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on  
drive-ready state.  
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending  
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-  
tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.  
Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-  
ready state.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
90  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The connection has been interrupted by a  
transmission tower or other device with a  
high transmitting power.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
The smartphone is shielded by a building or  
metallic object.  
Changing smartphones  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital  
Key, activate the new smartphone according to  
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The  
previous master key is deleted when the new  
smartphone is activated.  
Principle  
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the  
inside using the buttons for the central locking  
system.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-  
ing off.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights are illuminated.  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
Overview  
System limits  
With a digital key, the alarm system's interior  
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor can only  
be deactivated using the control display.  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 94.  
Malfunction  
Your Digital Key may not be detected by the  
vehicle under the following circumstances:  
The central locking buttons are located on the  
front door.  
The lock button.  
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
The unlock button.  
▷
There is an object, e.g., chip card or Key  
Card, between the smartphone and smart-  
phone cover.  
91  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking the vehicle from inside  
Unlocking and locking  
To lock the vehicle from the inside,  
press the lock button on the front door  
when the front doors are closed.  
Doors  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Lock" / "Lock/unlock" / "Unlock".  
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap  
are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks  
the entire vehicle.  
Unlocking the vehicle from inside  
To unlock the vehicle from the inside,  
press the unlock button on the front  
door.  
▷
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
Opening the door  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
When the vehicle is locked, doors can be  
opened as follows:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Lock" / "Lock/unlock".  
▷
On the front door, press the unlock  
button to unlock the doors together.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
Pull the door opener above the arm-  
▷
▷
"Unlock when approaching"  
"Lock when walking away".  
rest.  
▷
▷
Front doors: Pull the door opener on the  
door to be opened. The other doors remain  
locked.  
Enabling this setting also activates au-  
tomatic folding of the mirrors. Automatic  
folding of the mirrors can be deactivated  
again in the corresponding menu.  
Rear doors: Pull the door opener on the  
door to be opened twice: The first time un-  
locks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
Automatic unlocking  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Lock" / "Lock/unlock".  
Settings  
2. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
"Unlock doors when in P".  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
Automatic locking  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock" /  
"Lock/unlock" / "Lock after a short time".  
92  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after un-  
locking.  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is  
already unlocked"  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows"/"Lock" / "Lock/unlock".  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the cargo area can be operated with the  
vehicle key.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
"Lock tailgate button"  
▷
▷
▷
"Flash when unlocking"  
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-  
cle key is disabled.  
Unlocking is confirmed by two flashes.  
"Flash when locking"  
Adjusting the opening height  
You can set how far the tailgate can be  
opened.  
Locking is confirmed by one flash.  
With alarm system:  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
When adjusting the opening height, make sure  
the clearance above the tailgate is at least  
4 in/10 cm.  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Tailgate" / "Opening height"  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
Automatic folding of the side mirrors can be  
adjusted via iDrive.  
2. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired  
opening height.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock" /  
"Lock/unlock" / "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock".  
Opening/closing the cargo area with  
no-touch activation  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Tailgate"  
Cargo area  
Cargo area button on vehicle key  
It is possible to choose where to assign the  
cargo area button on the vehicle key.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Open with foot movement"  
"Close with foot movement"  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Tailgate" / "VEHICLE KEY" / "Tailgate  
button".  
Window  
Opening windows automatically  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows"  
2. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
93  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If this setting is enabled, the driver’s window  
opens automatically as soon as the vehicle  
reaches the saved location.  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
Alarm system  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
The cargo area can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will  
be locked and monitored again. The hazard  
warning system flashes once during closing.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
▷
If a door, the hood, or the cargo area is  
opened.  
▷
▷
If movement is detected inside the vehicle.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
If the vehicle has a different tilt, e.g., due  
to an attempt to steal a wheel or when tow-  
ing.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-  
cle key three times in succession.  
▷
▷
▷
If the battery voltage is interrupted.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
If the diagnostic socket is used improperly.  
If the vehicle is locked when a device is  
connected to the diagnostic socket.  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
The indicator light on the interior mirror shows  
the status of the alarm system:  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is activated or deactivated  
as soon as the vehicle is locked or unlocked.  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system does not turn on if the vehi-  
cle is locked manually from the inside.  
94  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm  
sensor are not activated because the  
doors, hood, or tailgate are not closed cor-  
rectly. Correctly closed access points are  
secured.  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm  
sensor will turn on when all open access  
points are closed.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all  
access points have been closed:  
Alarm system error.  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can be turned off as follows:  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
▷
As soon as the vehicle is locked,  
press the lock button on the vehicle  
key within 30 seconds.  
The alarm has been triggered.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The tilt alarm sensor is part of the alarm sys-  
tem and monitors the vehicle's tilt.  
▷
After turning off the standby state, an  
option to turn off the interior motion sensor  
and the tilt alarm sensor will be displayed  
on the control display.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are deactivated until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Interior motion sensor  
The interior motion sensor is part of the alarm  
system and monitors the vehicle interior.  
Ending the alarm  
To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle.  
The alarm system triggers when movement is  
detected inside the vehicle.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently  
be turned on via the emergency detection of  
the vehicle key.  
The windows must be closed for the system to  
function properly.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
Window  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
Principle  
The windows can be operated as follows:  
An unintentional alarm can be triggered in the  
following situations:  
95  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
With the vehicle key.  
On the door handle  
Using the door handle.  
Principle  
Using the switches inside the vehicle.  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
Safety information  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury and risk of property damage. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
windows can also be closed via the door han-  
dle using a compatible smartphone and digital  
key.  
With the vehicle key  
Additional information:  
Opening windows with the vehicle key  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
To open the windows with the vehicle  
key, unlock the vehicle, then press and  
hold the unlock button on the vehicle  
key.  
Functional requirements  
To close the windows using the door handle,  
the following functional requirements must be  
met:  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-  
ital key.  
Closing windows with the vehicle key  
With Comfort Access: To close the win-  
dows with the vehicle key, lock the ve-  
hicle, then press and hold the lock but-  
ton on the vehicle key.  
Closing windows with the door handle  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
To close a window using the door handle  
of a closed front door, place a finger on the  
grooved surface of the door handle and hold it  
there without reaching into the recessed grip.  
96  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
In addition to locking the vehicle, the windows  
and sun protection of the glass sunroof are  
closed and locked.  
The window opens automatically. Pressing  
the switch again stops the motion.  
Closing the windows  
To close the windows, proceed as follows:  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
▷
On the door, pull the power window  
switch to the resistance point.  
The window closes while the switch  
is being held.  
Inside the vehicle  
▷
On the door, pull the power window  
switch past the resistance point.  
Overview  
The window closes automatically.  
Pulling again stops the motion.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
The power window switches are lo-  
cated on the doors.  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
Functional requirements  
To close the windows inside the vehicle, the  
following functional requirements must be met:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Warning  
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside  
the vehicle.  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
Opening windows  
To open the windows, proceed as follows:  
▷
On the door, press the power win-  
dow switch to the resistance point.  
The window opens while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
On the door, press the power win-  
dow switch past the resistance  
point.  
97  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
Overview  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
1.  
On the door, pull the power window  
switch past the resistance point and hold it.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
certain threshold, closing is stopped.  
The safety switch is located on the  
driver's door.  
2.  
On the door, pull the power win-  
dow switch past the resistance point again  
within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.  
Turning the safety functions on/off  
To activate/deactivate the safety func-  
tion, press the safety switch on the  
driver’s door.  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The LED in the button illuminates when the  
safety function is switched on.  
Opening windows automatically  
If the driver’s window is frequently opened in  
the same location, the window can be set to  
open automatically. This is useful if you fre-  
quently use the same parking garage, for ex-  
ample.  
Glass sunroof  
General information  
The glass sunroof sun protection can be  
opened and closed.  
For the driver’s window to open automat-  
ically, the vehicle speed must be below  
6 mph/10 km/h and there must be sufficient  
GPS reception.  
With the vehicle key  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 92.  
Opening the sun protection  
To open the sun protection, press and  
hold the unlock button on the vehicle  
key after unlocking.  
Safety switch  
Principle  
The glass sunroof sun protection is opened  
as long as the button on the vehicle key is  
pressed.  
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-  
dren, for instance, from opening and closing  
the rear windows using the switches in the  
rear.  
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the  
safety function is switched off automatically.  
98  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Closing the sun protection  
Closing the sun protection  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key in close  
range of the vehicle after locking.  
The glass sunroof sun protection is closed  
as long as the button on the vehicle key is  
pressed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
Touch the grooved surface on the external  
door handle of a closed front door with your  
finger and hold it there without grasping the  
recessed grip.  
On the door handle  
Besides locking the vehicle, the windows and  
sun protection will be closed and locked.  
Principle  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
The sun protection can be closed using the  
external door handle without operating the ve-  
hicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
Inside the vehicle  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment.  
Overview  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
sun protection can also be closed with the ex-  
ternal door handle using a compatible smart-  
phone with a digital key.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
Functional requirement  
To close the sun protection using the door  
handle, the following functional requirements  
must be met:  
The sun protection switch is lo-  
cated in the headliner.  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the sun protection using the  
digital key.  
Functional requirements  
The sun protection can be operated under the  
following conditions:  
99  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
▷
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-  
alization is completed.  
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.  
The drive-ready state is established.  
Operation  
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes  
without the anti-trap mechanism.  
▷
▷
Slide switch back to the re-  
sistance point and hold.  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection.  
Initializing the system  
Slide switch forward to the  
resistance point and hold.  
To initialize the system, in the  
headliner, press the sun protec-  
tion switch upward and hold it  
until initialization is complete:  
The sun protection is closed  
as long as the switch is held  
down.  
▷
▷
Slide the switch back past the resistance  
point.  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
▷
If the sun protection is closed, it opens then  
closes again.  
The sun protection opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
▷
If the sun protection is open, it closes first,  
then opens and closes again.  
Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point.  
Initialization is complete once the sun protec-  
tion has opened then closed again.  
The sun protection closes automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Push switch up.  
The sun protection moves to a  
defined position to provide par-  
tial shading.  
Pressing the switch again closes  
the sun protection.  
Initializing after a power interruption  
General information  
If the power is interrupted while opening or  
closing, the sun protection can only be oper-  
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system  
can help in this case.  
The system can be initialized under the follow-  
ing conditions:  
100  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
In the event of an accident, having the correct  
seat position and using the protection systems  
correctly both play an important role. Follow  
the information in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 101.  
Electrically adjustable seats  
Seat belts, refer to page 103.  
Head restraints, refer to page 106.  
Airbags, refer to page 166.  
Principle  
Electrically adjustable seats are operated us-  
ing the switches on the seat.  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Front seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Additional information:  
Memory function, refer to page 111.  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
101  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Adjusting seat tilt  
The switches for setting the seats are located  
on the front seats.  
To adjust the seat tilt, flip the seat tilt switch up  
or down.  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
To adjust the longitudinal direction, push the  
longitudinal direction switch on the seat for-  
ward or backward.  
To adjust the backrest tilt, flip the backrest tilt  
switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
Adjusting the height  
Principle  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored  
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver  
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is  
reactivated at a later time, the saved position  
will be called up automatically.  
To adjust the seat height, press the seat height  
switch up or down.  
102  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Activate/deactivate the function  
Lumbar support  
To activate or deactivate the automatic seat  
adjuster, proceed as follows:  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re-  
gion of the spine. The lower back and spine  
are supported to promote an upright sitting po-  
sition.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort" /  
"Driver" / "Automatically use seat position".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Adjusting the backrest width  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
To adjust the lumbar support, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
▷
To increase or decrease the bulge,  
press the lumbar support button  
forward or backward.  
▷
To move the bulge up or down, press the  
lumbar support button up or down.  
Functional limitation  
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar  
support at very high and very low tempera-  
tures.  
▷
▷
To decrease the backrest width, push the  
front button:  
To increase the backrest width, push the  
rear button:  
Thigh support  
Seat belts  
Principle  
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-  
sure occupant safety. However, they can only  
offer protection when adjusted correctly.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
To adjust the thigh support, pull the thigh sup-  
port lever at the front of the seat then push the  
thigh support forward or backward.  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to  
achieve the best possible protective effect for  
the seat belts when used properly and with the  
correct seat settings.  
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear  
seats are intended for the persons sitting on  
the left and right.  
103  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is  
intended for the person sitting in the middle.  
▷
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
Safety information  
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Warning  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
Correct use of seat belts  
To use the seat belts correctly, note the follow-  
ing:  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
Warning  
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,  
the protective effect of the middle seat belt  
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat  
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
104  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Buckling the seat belt  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after turning on the drive-ready state  
when the seat belt reminder is active.  
1. To fasten the seat belt, guide the seat belt  
slowly over the shoulder and hip.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has  
been fastened correctly.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not buckled.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the ve-  
hicle is not buckled.  
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-  
responding seat.  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an  
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help  
position the buckle when not in use.  
Seat belt is not buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. To open the seat belt, hold the seat belt  
firmly.  
Rear Occupant Alert  
2. Press the red button on the seat belt  
buckle.  
Principle  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
At the end of the drive, the Rear Occupant  
Alert informs the driver that occupants may be  
present on the rear seats.  
Seat belt reminder  
General information  
Principle  
If a door with access to the rear seat row is  
operated within 30 minutes before starting a  
drive, a notice appears on the control display  
and a signal tone sounds at the end of the  
drive.  
The Seat Belt Warning warns the driver if the  
seat belts are not fastened.  
General information  
If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the  
notice is displayed again after the drive is com-  
plete.  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or  
on the passenger's side is not fastened.  
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-  
ing.  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
105  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
Activating/deactivating the Rear  
Occupant Alert  
To activate or deactivate the Rear Occupant  
Alert, proceed as follows:  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Rear Occupant Alert".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Warning  
Safety mode  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver  
and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-  
matically tightened once after driving off, if the  
seat belt is fastened.  
If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,  
during emergency braking, the front seat belts  
are automatically pretensioned.  
Warning  
After a critical driving situation without an acci-  
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If  
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,  
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-  
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the  
seat belt before continuing to drive.  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Adjusting the height  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
▷
To lower the height of the head restraint,  
press the release button on the backrest,  
106  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
arrow 1, then push the head restraint down-  
ward.  
Rear head restraints  
▷
To raise the height of the head restraint,  
push the head restraint upward.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Adjusting the distance  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
▷
▷
To move the head restraint backward,  
press the button on the side of the head re-  
straint, then push the head restraint back-  
ward.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
To move the head restraint forward, press  
the button on the side of the head restraint,  
then pull the head restraint forward.  
Warning  
Removing/attaching head restraints  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the seat in question.  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
1. Raise the head restraint to the resistance  
point.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
2. Press the release button on the backrest,  
arrow 1, then pull the head restraint com-  
pletely out.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
107  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
Outer head restraints: Adjusting the  
height  
Exterior mirrors  
Principle  
Exterior mirror settings are saved to the active  
BMW ID or driver profile. If the BMW ID or  
driver profile is reactivated later, the saved po-  
sition is brought up automatically.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's  
side exterior mirror also dims automatically.  
Photocells in the interior mirror are used to  
control this.  
▷
▷
To lower the head restraint, press the re-  
lease button on the backrest, arrow 1, then  
push the head restraint downward.  
To raise the head restraint, push the head  
restraint upward.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior  
mirrors are heated automatically as necessary  
and when drive-ready state is on.  
Removing/attaching head restraints  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the seat in question.  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
1. Fold down the corresponding rear seat  
backrest.  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be  
stored using the memory function.  
To fold down the rear seat backrest, follow  
the steps for enlarging the cargo area.  
Safety information  
2. Raise the head restraint to the resistance  
point.  
Warning  
3. Press both release buttons on the backrest,  
arrows 1, simultaneously then pull the head  
restraint completely out.  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
Additional information:  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 301.  
108  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the  
mirror glass.  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold  
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.  
To fold the exterior mirrors in/out,  
press the button for folding the exterior  
mirrors in/out on the driver's door.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic  
Curb Monitor.  
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.  
15 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-  
ful in the following situations:  
Select right exterior mirror.  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
On narrow roads.  
Selecting/adjusting the exterior  
mirrors  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
▷
To select the left exterior mirror,  
press the corresponding button on  
the driver’s door. The LED illumi-  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
nates.  
▷
To select the right exterior mirror,  
press the corresponding button on  
the driver’s door. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
On the driver's door, press the button  
for adjusting the exterior mirrors.  
The selected exterior mirror moves  
along with the button movement.  
109  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Overview  
Principle  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor  
1.  
To activate the Automatic Curb  
Monitor, press the exterior mirror button on  
the driver’s door. The LED illuminates.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the automatic dimming interior mirror:  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
▷
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, the Automatic Curb  
Monitor is deactivated.  
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
To deactivate the Automatic Curb Mon-  
itor, press the exterior mirror button on  
the front passenger door. The LED illu-  
minates and the LED of the driver’s side out-  
side mirror goes out.  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-  
cle is stationary only.  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
Principle  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Manual steering wheel adjustment  
Photocells in the mirror glass and on the rear  
of the mirror are used to control glare.  
The position of the steering wheel can be  
changed by manually adjusting the height and  
longitudinal direction.  
110  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
1. On the steering column, press the release  
lever all the way down.  
Overview  
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands  
and move the steering wheel to a height  
and angle that suits the seat position.  
3. Flip the lever back again.  
Memory function  
Principle  
The memory buttons are located on the driv-  
er's door.  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
Storing settings  
To save settings to memory using the buttons,  
proceed as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Lumbar support position.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
1. Set the desired position.  
2.  
Press the SET button on the driver's  
door. The LED illuminates.  
Safety information  
3. Press memory button 1 or 2 while the LED  
is illuminated. A successful save is indi-  
cated by a signal tone.  
Warning  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-  
tion when the vehicle is stationary.  
To save settings to memory via iDrive, proceed  
as follows:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".  
2. Select the desired seat position.  
3. Tap the icon for the SET button.  
111  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Calling up settings  
To access settings saved to memory using the  
buttons, proceed as follows:  
Press memory button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
To bring up settings saved to memory via  
iDrive, proceed as follows:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".  
2. Select the desired seat.  
3. Select the desired seat position.  
Seat climate control  
Various climate control functions are available  
for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Climate control, refer to page 271.  
112  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Children in the rear seat  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
General information  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
113  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
General information  
When selecting, installing, and using child re-  
straint systems, pay close attention to the op-  
erating and safety instructions provided by the  
child restraint system manufacturer.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
General information  
When using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front  
passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-  
bag, refer to page 168.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
114  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
On the front passenger seat  
Child seat security  
Deactivating the airbag  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
After mounting a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front  
passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-  
bag, refer to page 168.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in,  
then pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, to the highest position. This  
seat position and height ensure the best pos-  
sible position for the belt and offers optimal  
protection in the event of an accident.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Open the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-  
tem, adjust the backrest tilt so that the seat  
belt sits properly.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
Lower anchors for child  
restraint systems  
Principle  
LATCH child restraint systems establish a se-  
cure connection to the vehicle in combination  
with LATCH anchors.  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a  
child restraint system on the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
115  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
When selecting, installing, and using child re-  
straint systems, pay close attention to the op-  
erating and safety instructions provided by the  
child restraint system manufacturer.  
Position  
Icon  
Meaning  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
Mounts for lower anchors  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
General information  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Before installing a child restraint system, pull  
the seat belt away from the lower anchors of  
the child restraint system.  
Warning  
Installing child restraint systems  
To install the child restraint system in the vehi-  
cle, proceed as follows:  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
1. Mount the child restraint system in accord-  
ance with the instructions from the child  
seat manufacturer.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint system  
anchors engage correctly on both sides in  
the lower seat mounts.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
116  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
Safety information  
Icon  
Meaning  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Warning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
Routing the retaining strap  
Warning  
Rear seat  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
1
Driving direction  
Warning  
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
Rear seat  
To attach the upper strap to the attachment  
point, proceed as follows:  
1. Raise the head restraint as needed.  
2. Guide the upper strap between the head  
restraint rods, or along both sides of the  
117  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
head restraint rods, to the attachment  
point.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Child safety lock.  
3. Guide the strap between the backrest and  
cargo cover, where applicable.  
4. Attach the strap's hook to the attachment  
point.  
Apply the child safety lock.  
5. Tighten the strap.  
The door can now be opened from the outside  
only.  
Locking the doors and  
windows in the rear  
After locking, make sure that the door cannot  
be opened from the inside.  
Principle  
Safety switch for the rear  
To prevent the rear doors and windows from  
being opened from the inside, there is a switch  
on the corresponding rear door's frame or a  
safety switch on the driver’s door armrest.  
General information  
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-  
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance  
when transporting children.  
The safety switch for the rear is located  
on the driver's door.  
Doors  
To lock rear functions, press the safety  
switch in the driver’s door. The LED is  
illuminated when the safety function is  
turned on.  
Various functions are locked and cannot be  
operated in the rear such as the power win-  
dows.  
To secure the rear doors, release/lock the  
safety switch on the rear door using the  
integrated key.  
118  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Driving off  
To drive off with the vehicle, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Drive-ready state is turned on.  
Additional information:  
3. Engage the desired selector lever position,  
e.g., D or R.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
4. Release the parking brake.  
Start/Stop button  
5. To drive off, release the brake pedal and  
press the accelerator pedal.  
Principle  
The Start/Stop button is used to turn vehicle  
operating states on/off.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection  
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-  
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.  
Overview  
▷
When the vehicle is stationary and drive-  
ready state is on, as soon as selector lever  
position P is disengaged.  
▷
With electric driving up to approx.  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the  
environment. This helps other road users, e.g.,  
pedestrians or cyclists, be able to see the vehi-  
cle better.  
The Start/Stop button is located on the  
center console.  
Auto Start/Stop function  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake  
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop  
button.  
Principle  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
The system switches off the engine during a  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic  
lights. Drive-ready state remains on despite  
the engine being stopped. The engine starts  
automatically for driving off.  
Pushing the Start/Stop button again will turn  
off drive-ready state and turn on standby state.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 43.  
Standby state, refer to page 43.  
119  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to  
standby state whenever the engine is started  
using the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
Brake pedal was not depressed hard  
enough.  
The function is activated at low speeds.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Engine stop  
Vehicle interior has not yet been heated or  
cooled as desired.  
Functional requirements  
When stopping, the engine switches off auto-  
matically if the following requirements are met:  
Condensation is about to form on windows  
and automatic climate control is on.  
Engine or other components are not at op-  
erating temperature.  
▷
▷
Selector lever is in selector lever position D.  
The brake pedal remains depressed while  
the vehicle is at a standstill, or the vehicle is  
held by Automatic Hold.  
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.  
Without Mild Hybrid technology: The  
wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering  
wheel is being turned.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled, or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
Manual engine stop  
If the engine does not shut off automatically  
when the vehicle is stopped, the engine can be  
shut off manually as follows:  
The hood is unlocked.  
Hill Descent Control is activated.  
For stop-and-go traffic.  
▷
By quickly depressing the brake pedal from  
its current position.  
Selector lever position is S or R.  
After reversing.  
▷
By engaging selector lever position P.  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,  
the engine switches off.  
Starting the engine  
Functional requirements  
When driving off, the engine starts automati-  
cally if the following requirements are met:  
Automatic climate control with engine  
switched off  
The automatic climate control system's air flow  
is reduced when the engine is switched off.  
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.  
If the accelerator pedal is pressed when  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The READY indicator on the  
instrument cluster shows that  
the Auto Start/Stop function is  
ready to start the engine auto-  
matically.  
Driving off with the Auto Start/Stop  
function  
To drive off, accelerate normally after starting  
the engine.  
Safety mode  
If one of the following conditions is met, the  
engine will not start automatically after it has  
been stopped automatically:  
Functional limitations  
The engine does not switch off automatically in  
situations like the following:  
120  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, and the  
driver’s door is open.  
Via selector lever position or drive  
mode  
The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated in  
the following situations:  
The hood has been unlocked.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
▷
▷
When selector lever position S is engaged.  
The engine can only be started using the Start/  
Stop button.  
If SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving mode is  
selected in My Modes.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-  
tivated engine starts up automatically in the  
following situations:  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle  
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the vehicle interior is excessively  
warm, and the air conditioning is on.  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
When the vehicle interior is excessively  
cool, and the heating is on.  
Condensation is about to form on windows  
and automatic climate control is on.  
Selector lever position P is engaged au-  
tomatically.  
Without mild hybrid technology:  
In case of a steering operation.  
2. Engage the parking brake.  
Automatic deactivation  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-  
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.  
▷
When changing the selector lever position  
from D or P to R.  
▷
▷
If the vehicle battery is deeply discharged.  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
Malfunction  
Deactivating the system manually  
Auto Start/Stop no longer shuts off the engine  
automatically in the event of a malfunction. A  
Check Control message is displayed on the  
instrument cluster. You may continue driving.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Principle  
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams,  
it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/  
Stop manually. The engine will then no longer  
switch off automatically.  
If this function is deactivated while the engine  
is being stopped automatically, the engine will  
start.  
Steptronic transmission  
Via iDrive  
Principle  
1. To manually activate Auto Start/Stop, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain  
and chassis" / "Activate Auto Start/Stop".  
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's  
automatic transmission. The shift paddles can  
be used to shift gear manually as necessary.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
121  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-  
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.  
Safety information  
After standby state is switched off, if selec-  
tor lever position N is engaged.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is  
stationary and selector lever position D, S,  
or R is engaged.  
The vehicle may begin to move if selector lever  
position P is not engaged and the parking  
brake is not applied before leaving the vehicle.  
Selector lever positions  
Additional information:  
Gear position D  
Parking brake, refer to page 129.  
In selector lever position D, all gears for for-  
ward travel are shifted automatically.  
Engaging selector lever positions  
The vehicle drives off slowly when the brake  
pedal is released.  
General information  
If a gear position or reverse gear is engaged,  
the vehicle will move if the brake pedal is not  
pressed when driving off.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.  
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,  
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and  
gear position D without pressing the brake.  
R reverse gear  
To reverse, engage selector lever position R.  
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle drives off slowly when the brake  
pedal is released.  
To change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position, drive-ready state  
must be on and the brake pedal must be de-  
pressed.  
N Neutral  
To push the vehicle or have it coast without  
using the drive system, engage selector lever  
position N, e.g., in car washes.  
Selection lever position P cannot be disen-  
gaged until all technical prerequisites are met.  
Engaging a selector lever position  
To engage the selector lever position, proceed  
as follows:  
Parking position P  
General information  
In selector lever position P, the drive is blocked  
by the transmission, e.g., to park the vehicle.  
1. Fasten the driver’s seat belt.  
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever in the desired  
direction, past the resistance point as nec-  
P is engaged automatically  
Selector lever position P engages automati-  
cally in situations like the following:  
122  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
essary. The selector lever automatically re-  
turns to the center position when released.  
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car  
wash.  
To engage selector lever position N, proceed  
as follows:  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state.  
3. If necessary, loosen the belt.  
4. If necessary, open the door.  
5. Engage selector lever position N.  
6. Switch off drive-ready state.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
The vehicle can roll.  
The parking brake is engaged automatically  
after approx. 35 minutes.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
If necessary, release the transmission lock  
electronically.  
To engage selector lever position P,  
press the parking brake button on the  
center console.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 124.  
The parking brake is applied and the transmis-  
sion lock is engaged.  
Kickdown  
The maximum driving performance is achieved  
with kickdown.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
Principle  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
coast without power for a short distance, e.g.,  
in a car wash or when being pushed.  
S program  
Principle  
Engaging selector lever position N  
The S program's shift points and shift times  
are designed for sportier handling. The trans-  
mission, for instance shifts up later and the  
shifting times are shorter.  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of  
property damage. Do not switch off standby  
123  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Activating the Sport program  
Engaging selector lever position N  
To engage selector lever position N, proceed  
as follows:  
1. Quickly push the Start/Stop button three  
times without pressing the brake.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
3. Within 30 seconds, push the selector lever  
into position N until position N is shown on  
the selector lever.  
An appropriate Check Control message is  
displayed.  
To activate the Sport program, pull the selector  
lever from selector lever position D to D/S.  
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance S1.  
The sport program of the transmission is acti-  
vated.  
Shift paddles  
Ending the Sport program  
To cancel the Sport program, move the selec-  
tor lever to D/S.  
Principle  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are  
used to change gears manually.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
General information  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Shifting  
The selector lever position, for  
example, P, is shown on the in-  
strument cluster.  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and  
road speeds.  
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts  
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when  
speed limits are reached.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
Temporary manual mode  
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-  
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.  
General information  
To maneuver the vehicle out of a hazardous  
area, release the transmission lock electroni-  
cally.  
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, for instance D1.  
After conservative driving in manual mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to automatic  
mode.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure  
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance  
with a wheel chock.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
124  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is  
displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Advanced mode  
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-  
tronic transmission offers an advanced mode  
with adapted shift characteristics.  
Continuous manual mode  
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle  
switches to manual mode M.  
▷
Automatic downshift to lowest possible  
gear.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance M1.  
To have the Steptronic transmission auto-  
matically shift down to the lowest possible  
gear, pull and hold the left shift paddle.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
There is no downshifting for kickdown.  
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
▷
Automatic upshifting is prevented in  
manual mode.  
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-  
sion does not shift up automatically when  
speed limits are reached.  
Pull the selector lever to D/S.  
If M2 is set manually when the vehicle is sta-  
tionary, the transmission no longer shifts down  
to M1.  
Enabling advanced mode  
Advanced mode turns on in the following sit-  
uations, for example:  
Shifting  
▷
▷
The transmission is in manual mode.  
"SPORT PLUS": Settings for drive system  
in Sport Mode from My Modes.  
Steptronic Sport  
transmission: Launch  
Control  
▷
▷
To upshift, pull the right shift paddle.  
To downshift, pull the left shift paddle.  
Principle  
Launch Control ensures optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction and with dry ambi-  
ent conditions.  
The selected gear is shown briefly on the  
instrument cluster, then the current gear is  
shown again.  
General information  
Using Launch Control causes premature com-  
ponent wear since this function represents a  
very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off  
with Launch Control.  
125  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in  
the vehicle.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-  
mission must cool down for a short time before  
Launch Control can be used again. Launch  
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions  
when used again.  
Additional information:  
Break-in, refer to page 306.  
Functional requirement  
Launch Control can be used when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
System limits  
Driving off with Launch Control  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without  
Launch Control mode.  
To drive off with Launch Control, proceed as  
follows:  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
2. Engage forward gear.  
Sport Boost function  
3.  
Press the My Modes button on the  
center console.  
Principle  
The SPORT BOOST function can be used for  
upcoming acceleration, for example.  
4. Enable the driving dynamics setting:  
"SPORT PLUS".  
This function is operated with the shift paddles  
on the steering wheel.  
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on  
the brake.  
The system prepares the vehicle.  
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way  
down and hold.  
Overview  
Launch Control information is displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait  
briefly until the engine speed is constant.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
8. Release the brake within a few seconds of  
the Launch Control information illuminating.  
The vehicle accelerates.  
Upshifting is performed automatically.  
Launch Control stays on as long as the  
Launch Control information is displayed  
and the accelerator pedal is not released.  
The shift paddles are located on the steering  
wheel.  
Additional information:  
Setting for increased driving dynamics, refer to  
page 207.  
126  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Deactivating the function  
SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the right shift  
paddle until this display goes out.  
My Modes  
Principle  
My Modes are used to adjust vehicle handling  
and customize the overall experience in the  
interior.  
▷
▷
▷
Arrow 1: The SPORT BOOST function is ac-  
tive.  
The vehicle can be adapted depending on the  
situation using the various My Modes.  
Arrow 2: Countdown, the SPORT BOOST  
function is active.  
General information  
This affects the following systems, depending  
on vehicle equipment:  
Arrow 3: The SPORT BOOST function is  
used for maximum acceleration.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drive system.  
Using the function  
1. SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the left shift  
paddle until this display appears, arrow 1.  
Steering.  
Suspension.  
▷
▷
The function is active.  
Cruise control.  
A countdown is displayed on the instru-  
ment cluster, arrow 2.  
Display on the instrument cluster.  
Comfort functions in vehicle interior.  
BMW IconicSounds.  
2. Before the countdown changes to 0, press  
the accelerator pedal.  
▷
▷
The vehicle accelerates.  
Overview  
BOOST: This display is shown on the  
instrument cluster, arrow 3.  
The countdown can be restarted, for example  
if the function cannot be used immediately.  
To restart the countdown, pull and hold the left  
shift paddle again until the countdown is reset.  
Stopping the function  
The SPORT BOOST function is automatically  
interrupted if the countdown has reached 0  
or if the function was used in the acceleration  
process.  
My Modes button on the center con-  
sole.  
127  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Efficient mode, refer to page 324.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
If applicable, the driving mode  
selected is displayed on the in-  
strument cluster.  
More My Modes  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, more My  
Modes are available that change the ambiance  
in the vehicle interior:  
My Modes in detail  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Expressive Mode.  
Digital Art Mode.  
Relax Mode.  
General information  
Various My Modes are available depending on  
vehicle equipment.  
Silent Mode.  
Some My Modes affect vehicle handling. As  
such, these are also referred to as drive  
modes.  
Selecting My Modes  
To select My Modes, proceed as follows:  
Personal Mode  
Personal Mode is a drive mode that provides  
comfort-related settings.  
1.  
Press the My Modes button on the  
center console.  
2. Select the desired mode.  
Sport Mode  
Sport Mode is a drive mode that provides in-  
creased vehicle agility.  
Configuring My Modes  
Some My Modes can be configured individu-  
ally.  
Individual settings, e.g., for the driving dynam-  
ics, chassis, and drive system, can be config-  
ured as needed.  
1.  
Press the My Modes button on the  
center console.  
2. Select the desired mode.  
3. Select the settings icon.  
"SPORT PLUS": Under Driving Dynamics, this  
setting deactivates Dynamic Stability Control,  
thus limiting driving stability.  
Additional information:  
4. Select the desired settings.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 206.  
Changing the start mode  
Some My Modes can be set as the start mode.  
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-  
fer to page 207.  
The set start mode activates when drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
Efficient Mode  
Efficient Mode is a drive mode that provides  
consumption-optimized tuning and an antici-  
patory display.  
1.  
Press the My Modes button on the  
center console.  
2. Select the desired mode.  
3. Select the settings icon.  
128  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
4. "Start mode"  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
5. Select the desired mode.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Drive-off assistant  
Principle  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
On inclines, in selector lever position D, S, or  
R, this system prevents the vehicle from rolling  
opposite the set driving direction and provides  
drive-off support.  
Warning  
Driving off  
Engage a gear position and step on the accel-  
erator pedal to drive off.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
The parking brake is released automatically.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Depending on the load and driving situation or  
when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back  
slightly.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
If necessary, activate Automatic Hold.  
Additional information.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Parking brake  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
The parking brake button is located on  
the center console.  
129  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
"Drivetrain and chassis" / "Apply parking  
brake".  
Setting the parking brake  
With a stationary vehicle  
2. Select the desired setting.  
In selector lever position N, the parking brake  
does not engage automatically.  
To engage the parking brake, press  
the parking brake button on the center  
console.  
Releasing the parking brake  
The LED illuminates.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
To release the parking brake manually, pro-  
ceed as follows:  
The indicator light for the parking brake  
illuminates red.  
The parking brake is engaged and  
transmission lock is engaged.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
While driving  
Using the parking brake while driving serves as  
emergency braking.  
2.  
Push the parking brake button on  
the center console while pressing the brake  
pedal.  
To brake the vehicle, press and hold  
the parking brake button on the center  
console. The vehicle brakes hard for as  
long as the button is pressed.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
The transmission lock remains engaged  
until a gear position is selected.  
The indicator light for the parking brake  
illuminates red, a signal sounds, and  
the brake lights illuminate.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-  
mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-  
ary.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
Using the parking brake via iDrive  
The parking brake can be engaged or disen-  
gaged via iDrive. Additional information is also  
displayed.  
Engaging the parking brake  
automatically  
In some situations, the parking brake is en-  
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic  
Hold.  
1. To operate the parking brake via iDrive, go  
through the menu as follows. Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain  
and chassis" / "Apply parking brake".  
To apply the parking brake automatically when  
drive-ready state is turned off, configure the  
system as follows:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-  
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away  
before you exit.  
130  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.  
After getting out of the vehicle, secure it to pre-  
vent it from rolling away, using a wheel chock,  
for example.  
The driver’s door is open for more than one  
second and no pedal is pressed during this  
time.  
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the  
vehicle to a stop while driving.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability after  
a power interruption, an initialization may be  
required.  
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated.  
Safety information  
1. Activate standby state.  
Warning  
2.  
3.  
Press the parking brake button on  
the center console.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Press the parking brake button  
again after 2 seconds.  
The Check Control messages for the park-  
ing brake go out.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Function-related noises are normal.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
The indicator light for the parking brake  
indicates that the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Automatic Hold  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Principle  
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-  
matically applying and releasing the brake,  
e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-  
and-go traffic.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle  
is automatically held in place when it is station-  
ary.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
General information  
The parking brake engages automatically if the  
following requirements are met:  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
131  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
the indicator light for the parking brake illumi-  
nates green.  
Automatic parking brake application  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
Overview  
The indicator light for the parking brake  
changes from green to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The Automatic Hold button is located  
on the center console.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
Activating Automatic Hold  
To activate Automatic Hold, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving  
off, depending on the load and driving situation  
or when towing a trailer.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
Use the parking brake as needed to prevent  
the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.  
2.  
Press the Automatic Hold button on  
the center console.  
Deactivate Automatic Hold  
To deactivate Automatic Hold, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
The LED illuminates.  
The indicator light for Automatic Hold  
illuminates green.  
Press the Automatic Hold button on the  
center console.  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
The LED goes out.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
The indicator light for Automatic Hold  
goes out.  
If Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed, the vehicle is automatically se-  
cured to prevent it from rolling away after stop-  
ping.  
Automatic Hold is deactivated.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press the brake pedal when deactivating.  
As soon as Automatic Hold secures the  
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,  
132  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
xView  
Vehicle features and options  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following  
information is shown in xView, for example:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Specified longitudinal inclination.  
Specified lateral inclination.  
Specified height for current position.  
Additional information:  
With all-wheel drive: Distribution of drive  
torque to wheels.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Adjusting the display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, adaptive content or  
various static content for the display can be  
selected on the left-hand side bar:  
Live Vehicle  
Principle  
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your  
vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle  
status or current driving condition.  
1. To adjust the display, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Live  
Vehicle".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
Corresponding information is shown on the  
control display depending on the driving situa-  
tion. Fault statuses are not taken into account.  
Adaptive content or various static content can  
be selected.  
BMW Head-up display  
Principle  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance  
the speed. Information can be recorded with-  
out you having to look away from the road.  
Displayable content  
The following Live Vehicle content is displayed  
in alternating sequence or statically depending  
on the setting:  
The steering wheel buttons can be used to  
configure various views for the Head-up dis-  
play. Additional settings can be made on the  
control display, e.g., brightness or height.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 150.  
Current driving condition, refer to page 150.  
Sport displays, refer to page 150.  
Efficiency trainer, refer to page 324.  
Trip data, refer to page 146.  
xView.  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
Additional information:  
The displayed content may depend on the se-  
lected drive mode.  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 391.  
133  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
Overview  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
To turn the Head-up display on/off, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Displays" / "Head-up display" / "Head-up  
display".  
Head-up display views are projected onto the  
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-  
tective glass is located between the steering  
wheel and windshield.  
Settings  
Various settings can be configured for the  
Head-up display, e.g., height, rotation, or  
brightness. You can also set up specific views  
on the Head-up display separately, e.g., for  
Driver Assistance information.  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Head-up  
display".  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Speed.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Sport displays.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height of  
the Head-up display can be stored using the  
memory function.  
Shift lights.  
The Efficiency Coach.  
Lists and messages.  
The driver assistance systems.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Objects on the Head-up display's protective  
glass.  
Configuring a view  
Views can be configured for the Head-up dis-  
play independently of the view on the instru-  
ment cluster, e.g., reduced view.  
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-  
tective glass.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
1.  
Press the Settings button on the  
steering wheel.  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
2. "HEAD-UP"  
134  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Special windshield  
The special windshield is part of the Head-up  
display system.  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Saved Check Control messages and additional  
information such as the cause of a fault or  
the required action can be called up via Check  
Control.  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable this system to function.  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" / "Check  
Control".  
Check Control  
2. Select the desired text message.  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed in the  
instrument cluster as a text message with an  
icon.  
A Check Control message is displayed as  
a combination of indicator lights or warning  
lights and text messages on the instrument  
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-  
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound  
and a text message may appear on the control  
display.  
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-  
matically displayed on the control display. If  
several faults occur at once, the messages are  
displayed consecutively.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-  
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they  
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages  
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent  
Check Control messages are permanently dis-  
played but may be hidden temporarily.  
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate  
an active or saved Check Control mes-  
sage.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-  
sages are automatically displayed again after  
approx. 8 seconds.  
An arrow icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Control  
message can be hidden.  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Principle  
To hide Check Control messages, tilt  
the knurled wheel on the steering  
wheel to the left.  
The indicator lights and warning lights show  
the status of some vehicle functions or indicate  
when there is a fault in monitored systems.  
135  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-  
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Some indicator lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Red lights  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 196.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not  
buckled.  
Risk of collision  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 105.  
The warning light illuminates or flashes  
in conjunction with an acoustic signal if  
there is a risk of imminent collision.  
Airbag system  
Additional information:  
Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Pedestrian Warning  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
The warning light illuminates: risk of  
collision with a person, e.g., a pedes-  
trian or a cyclist detected. Increased  
awareness is required.  
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:  
risk of imminent collision with a person, e.g.,  
a pedestrian or a cyclist detected. Immediately  
initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 166.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 177.  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Warning  
Parking brake, refer to page 129.  
The warning light illuminates: risk of  
collision, e.g., with a vehicle detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:  
risk of imminent collision with a vehicle de-  
tected. Immediately initiate braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver.  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for braking.  
Additional information:  
136  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 174.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds:  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
The warning light illuminates: risk of  
collision with a vehicle crossing from  
the right detected. Increased aware-  
ness is required.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal  
sounds:  
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the  
surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-  
minent. The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable. It is possible that the  
system will not execute any supporting steer-  
ing movements.  
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:  
risk of imminent collision with a crossing vehi-  
cle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 179.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not on  
steering wheel  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds:  
The warning light illuminates: risk of  
collision with a vehicle crossing from  
the left detected. Increased awareness  
is required.  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment  
and national-market version, the driver's line of  
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.  
System interruption is imminent.  
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:  
risk of imminent collision with a crossing vehi-  
cle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if  
applicable.  
Additional information:  
It is possible that the system will not execute  
any supporting steering movements.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 179.  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with  
your hands and pay attention to the surround-  
ing traffic.  
Distance control  
Additional information:  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Additional information:  
Yellow lights  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Antilock Braking System  
137  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
The ability to steer may be restricted during full  
braking.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 206.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated, or  
increased driving dynamics activated  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated  
or enhanced driving dynamics is acti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 206.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 206.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds: A system interruption is  
imminent.  
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-  
fer to page 207.  
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Drive-off support  
Drive-off support is activated.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Additional information:  
Drive-off support, refer to page 208.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not on  
steering wheel  
Flat tire monitor  
Steering wheel icon illuminates yellow:  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 353.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
Tire pressure monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
138  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 373.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection has  
malfunctioned. Increased caution when  
maneuvering.  
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle  
checked by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to  
page 119.  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 346.  
Steering system  
Green lights  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
Turn signal  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
The turn signal is turned on.  
If the indicator light is flashing unusu-  
ally fast, this indicates that a turn signal  
bulb has failed.  
Exhaust emissions  
Additional information:  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
Turn signal, refer to page 152.  
The exhaust gas quality is declining,  
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is  
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle  
checked as soon as possible.  
Parking lights  
The parking lights are turned on.  
Additional information:  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 156.  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Low-beam headlights  
The low-beam headlights are turned  
on.  
Additional information:  
139  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights, refer to  
page 156.  
Cruise Control  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
Low-beam headlights are turned on,  
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant is activated.  
Distance control  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
The high-beam headlights are turned on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic.  
Additional information:  
detected ahead of you.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 153.  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has  
driven off.  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Indicator light flashes: System is ac-  
tively issuing a warning. If necessary, the sys-  
tem performs a steering intervention.  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 183.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.  
Automatic Hold is activated  
After stopping, Automatic Hold auto-  
matically secures the vehicle to prevent  
it from rolling away.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
Automatic Hold secures the stopped  
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,  
e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.  
Arrow icon for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 228.  
140  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change not  
possible  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-  
propriate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur-  
rently possible.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon  
as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 228.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
White lights  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 231.  
No Distance Control because accelera-  
tor pedal is being pressed.  
Blue lights  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
High-beam headlights  
High-beam headlights have been  
turned on.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system can be used.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights, refer to page 152.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 231.  
Gray lights  
Seat belt reminder  
Selection lists  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-  
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
Seat belts, refer to page 103.  
Distance control  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Current audio source.  
List of recent calls.  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively resume con-  
trol by pressing on the brake pedal or accelera-  
tor pedal.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
Additional information:  
141  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Example: selecting a radio station  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
1.  
To select a radio station, press the  
entertainment source button on the right of  
the steering wheel.  
Operating Function  
elements  
2.  
To switch to the radio stations list,  
tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed list.  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected radio station.  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
Turn the knurled wheel: display  
the list for currently selected en-  
tertainment source or scroll up  
or down in the list.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move selec-  
tion to left or right.  
button.  
2.  
To select an entertainment source,  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
turn the knurled wheel.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected entertainment source.  
Display  
Gear shift indicator  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
General information  
The gear shift indicator is active in manual  
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version.  
142  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Display  
Information on upshifts or downshifts or the  
engaged gear is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the  
engaged gear is displayed.  
Example Description  
In continuous manual mode M:  
Optimal gear is engaged.  
Needle in lower range of arrow 1: display for  
energy recovery such as while decelerating,  
CHARGE.  
With shift paddles: temporary  
manual mode.  
Needle in upper range of arrow 2: drive power  
in percent, POWER.  
With shift paddles: Sport program.  
Shift information.  
Reduced drive power  
The available drive power may be reduced due  
to certain factors. The power gauge is auto-  
matically adjusted accordingly.  
Additional information:  
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and  
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.  
Shift paddles, refer to page 124.  
Icon  
Description  
Power gauge  
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.  
White icon: increased drive sys-  
tem temperature, for instance  
due to sustained or high  
power demand when driving  
on mountain roads.  
Principle  
The power gauge indicates the currently  
drawn drive power as a percentage.  
Enabling/disabling the power gauge  
The power gauge or the tachometer is dis-  
played depending on the selected drive mode  
or the individually configured layout.  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market ver-  
sion:  
Drive power limitation defined  
via the BMW Digital Key.  
System-related functional limi-  
tation.  
A Check Control message is  
displayed in addition where ap-  
plicable.  
143  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Tachometer  
Engine temperature  
The engine temperature is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
General information  
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning  
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to  
protect the engine.  
▷
If the engine is cold, the nee-  
dle is in the blue temperature  
range, close to the limit po-  
sition of the temperature dis-  
play. WARM-UP is also dis-  
played.  
Activating/deactivating the  
tachometer  
The tachometer is displayed depending on the  
selected drive mode or the individually config-  
ured layout.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷
▷
At normal operating temperature, the nee-  
dle is in the middle or in the left half of the  
temperature display.  
The tachometer display changes depending  
on the selected driving mode.  
If the engine is hot, the needle is in the  
red temperature range. In addition, a Check  
Control message is displayed.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
The reduced rotational speed range may be  
due to certain factors, e.g., a cold drive sys-  
tem. The tachometer display is automatically  
adjusted depending on the available rotational  
speed range.  
Additional information:  
Coolant level, refer to page 369.  
Display  
The engine temperature is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
▷
If the engine is cold, the nee-  
dle is in the blue temperature  
range, close to the left-hand  
limit position of the temper-  
ature display. WARM-UP is  
also displayed.  
If OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, drive-ready state  
is switched off and standby  
state is switched on.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
If READY is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, the Auto Start/  
Stop function is ready to start  
the engine automatically.  
▷
▷
At normal operating temperature, the nee-  
dle is in the middle or in the left half of the  
temperature display.  
If the engine is hot, the needle is in the  
red temperature range. In addition, a Check  
Control message is displayed.  
Additional information:  
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 41.  
Additional information:  
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 119.  
Coolant level, refer to page 369.  
144  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
Functional requirements  
▷
Manual mode M must be activated.  
▷
Advanced mode must be activated.  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Advanced mode, refer to page 125.  
Outside temperature  
Display  
Principle  
If the outside temperature indicator drops to  
+37℉/+3℃ or lower, there is an increased risk  
of slippery conditions.  
A signal sounds and a Check Control message  
is displayed.  
When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed,  
the temperature displayed may differ slightly  
from the actual outside temperature due to ex-  
ternal environmental influences.  
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate  
an upcoming shift point.  
▷
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the  
latest.  
Safety information  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes red and  
the fuel supply is interrupted in order to  
protect the engine.  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
Central display range  
Displayable content  
In the central display area, the following set-  
tings can be selected:  
Shift lights  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The reduced display.  
Trip data, refer to page 146.  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
With navigation system: route preview.  
With navigation system: map view.  
G-Meter, refer to page 148.  
The entertainment.  
Principle  
Shift lights are temporarily displayed on the  
instrument cluster and indicate the correct time  
to upshift in order to achieve rapid accelera-  
tion.  
The Shift lights are active in M Manual mode  
and can be shown on the instrument cluster or  
Head-up display in combination with the tach-  
ometer.  
Augmented View.  
145  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-  
mented View on the instrument cluster en-  
ables the visualization of driver assistance  
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-  
ings.  
Trip data  
Principle  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption  
or trip distance.  
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-  
imum distance to the preceding vehicle  
when speed control systems are deacti-  
vated.  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
▷
Android Auto©.  
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle  
menu, the trip data is shown on the control  
display.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, select functions of  
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-  
played, e.g., map views.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
Some contents for the central display range  
can also be configured as a view in the Head-  
up display.  
Display on the control display  
Displayable content  
Additional information:  
The following trip data is shown on the control  
display:  
Head-up display, refer to page 133.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
▷
▷
Configured interval for trip data displays.  
The average fuel consumption depend-  
ing on the configured interval.  
Configuring the central display  
range  
The content of the central display range on the  
instrument cluster can be configured individu-  
ally, for instance the trip data display.  
▷
▷
▷
The travel time depending on the con-  
figured interval.  
The distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
The distance traveled in coasting  
mode.  
1.  
Press the Settings button on the  
steering wheel.  
Displaying trip data continuously  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
To display trip data permanently, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Live Vehicle" / "Adaptive content" / "Trip  
data".  
2. "CONTENT"  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information on consumption and distance cov-  
ered can be displayed in the instrument cluster  
display.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
146  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
"Since last refuel": the values are au-  
tomatically reset after refueling with a  
larger quantity of fuel.  
"Since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.  
Average consumption, arrow 2.  
"Since Individual ()": the values since  
the last manual reset are displayed. The  
values can be reset at any time.  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval, arrow 3.  
Resetting average values manually  
The average values of the trip data can be  
reset manually:  
An icon is displayed when coasting.  
Total mileage, arrow 4.  
▷
"since individ.".  
Current consumption  
Using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel:  
The current fuel consumption display allows  
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,  
to drive economically and in an environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
1. Display trip data on the instrument cluster.  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel until the values reset.  
Mild hybrid technology: Depending on vehi-  
cle equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted  
and the engine continues to run when driving  
slowly or even when the vehicle is stationary.  
In this case, the internal combustion engine is  
operated electrically.  
To reset the average values via iDrive, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Time period for  
trip data" / "Reset Individual".  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally activated:  
Average consumption  
The average fuel consumption is displayed in  
the instrument cluster depending on how the  
intervals for displaying trip data are configured.  
"since individ.".  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
Assisted View  
Principle  
With Assisted View, information on the driver  
assistance systems can be displayed on the  
instrument cluster with a vehicle image.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Time period for trip data" / "Values".  
Parking and maneuvering information is dis-  
played in the Assisted View whenever the  
parking assistance system is on.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
147  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
G-Meter  
Principle  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
The display can be configured on the central  
display range of the instrument cluster.  
The values are automatically reset whenever  
you start a new drive.  
General  
Additional information:  
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-  
played on the central display range.  
Central display area, refer to page 145  
Additional information:  
Manually reseting G-Meter values  
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument  
cluster.  
Central display area, refer to page 145  
Display  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel until the values reset.  
Date and time  
Various settings can be configured for display-  
ing the date and time.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the time zone can be set man-  
ually or automatically. Automatic time zone ad-  
justment automatically updates the time, the  
date, and the time zone as necessary.  
An example of active Driver Assistance: the  
indicator and warning lights for Distance Con-  
trol and Assisted Driving Mode are displayed.  
At the same time, the Distance Control is ani-  
mated in Assisted View.  
The date is set automatically based on the  
time zone.  
System limits  
The detection capability of the Assisted View  
system is limited.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Time".  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
148  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Fuel gauge  
NOTICE  
Principle  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel  
promptly.  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
Additional information:  
Display  
Refueling, refer to page 328.  
The current range in the instru-  
ment cluster is displayed as a  
numerical value next to the fuel  
gauge.  
Display  
Next to the fuel gauge in the  
instrument cluster, an arrow be-  
side the fuel pump icon shows  
which side of the vehicle the fuel  
filler flap is on.  
General information  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
The current range is displayed as numerical  
value.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Range  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
Principle  
The range in the instrument cluster indicates  
the distance that can still be covered with the  
current tank of fuel.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Units".  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
149  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Driving.  
Vehicle status  
Coasting mode: "Efficient coasting"  
"Charging battery"  
Principle  
With mild hybrid technology:  
In the Vehicle status menu, the statuses can  
be displayed or actions performed for several  
systems such as for Check Control.  
▷
Adaptive recuperation.  
Depending on the situation, additional in-  
formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-  
played.  
Displaying vehicle status  
To display the vehicle status, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Vehicle status".  
▷
Efficient rolling with engine switched off.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 322.  
Coasting, refer to page 323.  
Overview  
Functional requirements  
Icon  
Description  
▷
Personal Mode or Efficient Mode drive  
mode must be selected.  
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of  
the flat tire monitor, refer to  
page 353.  
▷
With Live Vehicle, the following settings  
must be selected: "Adaptive content"  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 346.  
Display  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 367.  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 135.  
"Service": display of the service  
notifications, refer to page 151.  
An example:  
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.  
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-  
cle decelerates, arrow 2.  
Current driving condition  
Principle  
The current driving condition is displayed dy-  
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle  
menu on the control display.  
Sport displays  
Principle  
The following states can be displayed:  
The sport displays in the Live Vehicle menu  
provide assistance for a sporty driving style.  
150  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Entering appointment dates  
The dates for mandatory vehicle inspections  
can be entered.  
▷
Sport drive mode must be selected.  
▷
With Live Vehicle, the following settings  
must be selected: "Adaptive content"  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
Display  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /  
"Service" / "Vehicle inspection".  
The sport displays are displayed in the Live  
Vehicle menu on the control display.  
The following information is displayed:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The torque.  
The power.  
The boost pressure.  
The engine oil temperature.  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
General information  
After turning on, the next service appointment  
or the distance remaining until the next servic-  
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
Display  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /  
"Service".  
Maintenance work as well as possible le-  
gally mandated inspections are displayed.  
2. Select the desired entry to bring up more  
information.  
151  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
One-touch signaling  
For one-touch signaling: Lightly tap the turn  
signal lever up or down.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" / or  
"Settings" / "One-touch turn signal".  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Turn signal  
Brief flashing  
To flash the turn signal briefly: Push the turn  
signal lever to the resistance point and hold it  
there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.  
Principle  
The turn signal indicates the change in your  
direction of travel. To indicate a turn, the fol-  
lowing functions can be used:  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
▷
▷
▷
Flashing.  
One-touch signaling.  
Brief flashing.  
Principle  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
The high-beam headlights illuminate the road,  
also at great distances. The headlight flasher  
is used to emit a brief light signal by actuat-  
ing the high-beam headlights. The high-beam  
headlights can be switched on and off man-  
ually at any time.  
To ensure that the turn signal lamps on the  
exterior mirror are clearly visible, do not fold in  
the exterior mirrors while driving and while us-  
ing the turn signals or hazard warning system.  
Flashing  
To flash the turn signal, push the turn signal  
lever up or down past the resistance point.  
152  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
High-beam headlights, turning  
headlight flasher on/off  
General information  
In the low speed range, the high-beam head-  
lights are not switched on by the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
the Automatic High Beam Assistant:  
▷
▷
The automatic lights function is activated.  
The low-beam headlights are turned on.  
To turn on the high-beam headlights, push  
the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1. The  
high-beam headlights illuminate when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant can be  
activated via iDrive:  
To turn off the high-beam headlights or oper-  
ate the headlight flasher, pull the turn signal  
lever backward, arrow 2.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Headlights".  
The blue indicator light on the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the high-  
beam headlights are turned on or the  
headlight flasher is activated.  
2.  
Tap the High Beam Assistant button.  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
The green indicator light on the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the low-  
beam headlights are turned on.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant promptly  
detects other road users as well as the ambi-  
ent lighting, e.g., in towns, and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
If the Automatic High Beam Assistant is on  
and you continue driving after an interruption,  
the Automatic High Beam Assistant will re-  
main on.  
You may need to activate the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant via iDrive before it can be  
used. You can use the turn signal lever to tem-  
porarily deactivate or activate the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant, e.g., after turning your  
high-beam headlights on/off manually.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deac-  
tivated when the high-beam headlights are  
switched on and off manually.  
153  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1.  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
when adjusting the sensitivity of the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant:  
▷
Adjustment is possible only while your vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The light is switched off.  
Increasing sensitivity  
To increase the sensitivity of the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant, push the turn signal  
lever forward for approx. 10 seconds.  
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1, or  
pull the turn signal lever backward when the  
high-beam headlights are on, arrow 2.  
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the  
turn signal lever is not possible.  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
To reset the sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant, push the turn signal lever for-  
ward again for approx. 10 seconds or switch off  
drive-ready state.  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high-beam headlights. Therefore,  
154  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
when appropriate, turn off the high-beam  
headlights manually.  
Overview  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
Buttons in the vehicle  
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
The exterior lighting switch and buttons are  
located on the turn signal lever, to the left of  
the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
Icon  
Function  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Exterior lighting menu.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Exterior lighting off.  
Exterior lighting  
Principle  
The exterior lighting comprises all lighting ele-  
ments on the outside of the vehicle. The exte-  
rior lighting, or individual functions of it, can be  
operated using the buttons in your vehicle, the  
buttons on your vehicle key, or via iDrive.  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Functions via iDrive  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic headlight control.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Exterior lighting off.  
155  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Activate automatic headlight control  
Icon  
To activate the automatic lights, turn  
the outer switch on the turn signal lever  
downward.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant.  
Parking lights.  
The LED under the automatic lights icon illumi-  
nates.  
The green indicator light on the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the low-  
beam headlights are turned on.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Right roadside parking light.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Icon  
Function  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
Pathway lighting.  
Low-beam headlights,  
parking lights and roadside  
parking lights  
Driving lights automatic  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights are used to illumi-  
nate the road without dazzling oncoming traf-  
fic. The parking lights and roadside parking  
lights are used to illuminate the vehicle when  
stationary. These functions can be operated  
using the buttons in the vehicle or via iDrive.  
Principle  
The automatic lights function switches the  
low-beam headlights on or off automatically  
depending on the ambient brightness, e.g., in  
tunnels, at dusk, or with precipitation.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
Low-beam headlights  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
The automatic lights function is deactivated  
if you turn on the low-beam headlights man-  
ually.  
To turn on the low-beam headlights,  
turn the outer switch on the turn signal  
lever upward.  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
156  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The green indicator light on the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the low-  
beam headlights are turned on.  
▷
Press the OFF button on the turn  
signal lever.  
▷
▷
Turn off the light via iDrive.  
Switch on drive-ready state.  
To turn on the low-beam headlights even  
when standby state is switched on, turn the  
outer switch on the turn signal lever upward  
again.  
When drive-ready state is turned on, the  
automatic driving lights activate.  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be turned off as fol-  
lows at low speeds:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Parking lights".  
▷
▷
Press the OFF button on the turn  
signal lever.  
Turn off the light via iDrive.  
2.  
Tap the roadside parking light button for  
the desired side of the vehicle.  
Parking lights  
Welcome lights  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at low  
speeds.  
Principle  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
Turning on parking lights  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Parking lights".  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
2.  
Tap the parking lights button.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
The welcome light can be activated or deacti-  
vated.  
The green indicator light on the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the park-  
ing lights are turned on.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings".  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
2. Select the desired setting, depending on  
vehicle equipment:  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
Turning off parking lights  
The following options are available to turn off  
the parking lights:  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are turned on.  
▷
"BMW Iconic Glow"  
157  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
You can configure the radiator grille  
lighting only when the vehicle is station-  
ary and drive-ready state is off.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
You can turn on the pathway lighting as fol-  
lows:  
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,  
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.  
Turning on the welcome light  
You can turn on the welcome light as follows:  
▷
▷
Automatic activation when approaching.  
Activation when unlocking vehicle.  
▷
On the vehicle key, press and hold  
the panic alarm button for approx. 1 second.  
Setting the duration  
You can configure the duration of pathway  
lighting.  
▷
With the vehicle locked, press the  
lock button on the vehicle key.  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will  
be turned on.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings" / "Pathway lighting".  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Welcome Light Carpet  
Daytime driving lights  
Principle  
The daytime driving lights are used to ensure  
that the vehicle is more visible, e.g., in areas  
with sharply changing light conditions.  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The light source is located in the position indi-  
cated.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.  
Pathway lighting  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings".  
Principle  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior light-  
ing that illuminates the vehicle's surroundings  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle.  
2. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version, select the desired  
setting:  
158  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
"BMW Iconic Glow"  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
The Adaptive Headlight Range Control com-  
pensates for vehicle acceleration, braking, and  
load conditions to prevent your headlights from  
dazzling oncoming traffic.  
Adaptive lighting functions  
Principle  
The adaptive lighting functions provide dy-  
namic illumination of the road.  
Instrument lighting  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Principle  
The instrument lighting illuminates switches  
and buttons with the individually set bright-  
ness.  
▷
Cornering light.  
The brightness of the instrument lighting can  
only be adjusted in darkness and when the  
parking lights or low-beam headlights are  
turned on.  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
To activate the adaptive lights, turn the  
outer switch on the turn signal lever  
downward.  
Setting the brightness  
The brightness of the instrument lighting can  
be adjusted.  
The LED on the turn signal lever illuminates.  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Cockpit brightness".  
Cornering light  
2. Select the desired setting.  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
Interior lighting  
Principle  
The interior lighting comprises all lighting ele-  
ments inside the vehicle. Depending on vehicle  
equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights,  
entry lights, ambient light, and speaker lighting  
are controlled automatically.  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals. When  
driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be  
automatically switched on regardless of the  
steering-wheel angle.  
159  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
In the headliner, press the desired  
reading light button.  
Overview  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights  
in the front and rear.  
The reading lights can also can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Reading light".  
The interior lighting menu button is lo-  
cated in the headliner.  
2.  
Select the icon for the desired seat  
reading light.  
The brightness of the reading lights can be  
adjusted when they are turned on.  
The buttons for reading lights are lo-  
cated in the headliner.  
Changing settings  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the bright-  
ness can be individually adjusted for specific  
seats.  
The interior light button is located in  
the headliner.  
Turning interior lights on/off  
The interior lights can be turned on/off using  
the button in the headliner.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Reading light".  
Press the interior light button in the  
headliner.  
2. Tap the desired seat.  
3. Select the desired settings.  
To turn off the interior light permanently, press  
and hold the button for approx. 3 seconds.  
Ambient light  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently. The  
button is located in the rear headliner.  
Principle  
The interior lights can be turned on or off via  
iDrive.  
The ambient light comprises several light ele-  
ments that provide diffuse light in the vehicle  
interior. Depending on the vehicle equipment,  
you can adjust the lighting level for some lights  
via iDrive.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Reading light".  
2.  
Select the interior lights icon.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
To activate/deactivate the ambient light, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" / "Ambient  
lighting" / "Ambient lighting".  
Turning reading lights on/off  
The reading lights can be turned on/off using  
the button in the headliner.  
160  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
To activate/deactivate this function, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" / "Ambient  
lighting" / "Reduced for night driving".  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
Speaker lighting  
Principle  
Selecting the color  
You can choose the color of the ambient light  
in Personal Mode.  
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.  
Turning speaker lighting on/off  
The speaker lighting is switched on when the  
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Ambient lighting" / "Color".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Window wiper system  
Setting the brightness  
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad-  
justed.  
Principle  
The wiper system makes sure that you have a  
clear view, e.g., in the rain. It is operated using  
the wiper lever on the steering wheel.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Ambient lighting".  
2. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Dynamic light  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
With the Dynamic Light function, certain ac-  
tions, e.g., incoming calls or obstacles detected  
when opening door, are indicated by light ef-  
fects. If the ambient light is disabled, the light  
effects are still displayed.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Ambient lighting" / "Lighting effects".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
NOTICE  
Reduced lighting when driving at  
night  
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-  
161  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the  
window is dry.  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
To turn off the wipers or to activate flick wiping,  
proceed as follows:  
Turning on window wiper system  
▷
To turn off: Push the wiper lever downward,  
arrow 1, until position 0 is reached.  
▷
To flick wipe: Push the wiper lever down-  
ward from position 0, arrow 1, and push the  
wiper lever forward to position 0 or position  
1, arrow 2.  
The wiper lever returns to its initial position  
when released.  
To turn on the wiper system, push the wiper  
lever upward to the desired position.  
Rain sensor  
Principle  
Position  
Function  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind-  
shield, directly in front of the interior mirror.  
Position 0.  
Position 1.  
Position 2.  
Position 3.  
Rest position of wipers.  
Rain sensor mode.  
Normal wiper speed.  
Fast wiper speed.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
When you continue driving after stopping with  
the window wiper system on, the wipers will  
operate at the previous setting.  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
162  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Activating rain sensor  
Window washer system  
Safety information  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the window washer  
system when the washer fluid will not freeze.  
Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.  
To activate the rain sensor: Push the wiper  
lever upward from position 0, arrow 1, once.  
Wiping operation is started.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
NOTICE  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of property damage. Do not  
use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
To deactivate the rain sensor: Push the wiper  
lever back to position 0.  
Cleaning the windshield  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
To clean the windshield, pull the wiper lever  
back.  
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor,  
turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever as  
follows:  
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield  
directly in front of the wiper blade when the  
wiper moves up.  
▷
To set the rain sensor sensitivity to high,  
turn the knurled wheel up.  
▷
To set the rain sensor sensitivity to low,  
turn the knurled wheel down.  
163  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
Rear wiper  
Switching on the rear wiper  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
To turn on the rear wiper, rotate the outer  
switch on the wiper lever upward.  
Switch posi- Function  
tion  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Position 0.  
Position 1.  
Rest position of the wiper.  
Intermittent operation.  
When reverse gear is en-  
gaged, the system switches  
to continuous operation.  
Clean the rear window  
To clean the rear window, turn the outer switch  
on the wiper lever as follows:  
▷
▷
In rest position: Turn the switch downward,  
arrow 3. The switch returns to its rest posi-  
tion when released.  
In intermittent operation: Turn the switch  
further, arrow 2. The switch automatically  
returns to its interval position when re-  
leased.  
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid  
reservoir fill level is low.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
164  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the wipers  
To fold the wipers away from the windshield,  
proceed as follows:  
1. Activate standby state.  
2. Push the wiper lever down or forward and  
hold it until the wipers stop in an approxi-  
mately vertical position.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
Folding in the wipers  
To fold in the wipers, proceed as follows:  
1. Fold the wipers back in toward the wind-  
shield.  
2. Turn on standby state, then press the wiper  
lever down or forward again and hold it.  
The wipers return to their rest position and  
are ready for operation.  
165  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Vehicle features and options Airbags  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Principle  
The airbag system provides additional protec-  
tion in the event of an accident, especially if the  
seat belt is worn correctly.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
1
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
3
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and  
lap area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
166  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep  
the risk of injuring hands or arms as low as  
possible when the airbag deploys.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
Ejection Mitigation  
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can cross over the steering wheel.  
Select the settings so that the shoulder  
rests against the backrest when crossing  
the hands and the upper body is as far  
back as possible while still maintaining a  
comfortable grip on the steering wheel.  
The head airbag system is designed as an  
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce  
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
Knee airbag  
The availability of the knee airbag depends on  
the national-market version.  
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
▷
▷
Keep the dashboard and windshield on the  
passenger's side clear, i.e., do not cover  
with adhesive film or other coating, and do  
not attach mounts for, e.g., navigation devi-  
ces or mobile phones.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them, and do not  
modify them in any way.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Do not use the front passenger's side air-  
bag cover for storage.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats unless  
they are specifically designed for seats with  
integrated airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
To ensure that the airbag system has the opti-  
mal protective effect, note the following:  
Do not modify individual components or  
wiring. This also applies to the dashboard,  
steering wheel covers, and seats.  
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten seat belts correctly.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
167  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Even when all instructions are followed closely,  
the airbags may still cause injury upon contact  
in certain situations.  
Malfunction  
▷
The airbag system warning light on  
the instrument cluster does not il-  
luminate when drive-ready state is  
on.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
The airbag system warning light on the in-  
strument cluster illuminates continuously.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Additional warnings and information on the  
airbags are also found on the sun visors.  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
Setting the front seat positions  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 101.  
Warning  
Deactivating the front  
passenger airbag  
automatically  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Principle  
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-  
vation system can detect if the front passenger  
seat is occupied.  
The front passenger airbag is activated or de-  
activated accordingly.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The airbag system warning light on the  
instrument cluster illuminates briefly  
when drive-ready state is turned on,  
thus indicating the operational readiness of the  
entire airbag system and seat belt tensioners.  
168  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
as flat as possible against the rear seat  
backrest.  
Safety information  
▷
Observe the maximum size of the child re-  
straint system, for example to avoid possi-  
ble touching the roof.  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions in the section “Children on the  
front passenger seat”.  
Additional information:  
Install child restraint systems, refer to page 114.  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag  
The front passenger airbag indicator light in  
the headliner shows the operating state of the  
front passenger airbag.  
Functional requirements  
To ensure that occupants on the front pass-  
enger seat are detected properly, the following  
functional requirements apply:  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
The indicator light shows whether the airbag is  
activated or deactivated.  
After drive-ready state is turned on, the indi-  
cator light illuminates briefly and then shows  
whether the airbag is activated or deactivated.  
▷
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
Display  
Function  
Sit upright in the seat with the back against  
the backrest.  
The indicator light is contin-  
uously illuminated when the  
seat is not occupied or when a  
child is detected on the seat in  
a provided child restraint sys-  
tem as intended. The airbag  
on the front passenger's side  
is not activated.  
Sit down with your feet touching the floor.  
Installing child restraint systems  
To ensure that occupants on the front pass-  
enger seat are detected properly, note the fol-  
lowing:  
▷
When using child restraint systems, pay  
close attention to the operating and safety  
instructions provided by the child restraint  
system manufacturer.  
The indicator light does not il-  
luminate when, for instance, a  
correctly seated person of suf-  
ficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbag on the front  
passenger's side is activated.  
▷
▷
Make sure that the seat surface of the child  
restraint system rests as flat as possible on  
the seat surface.  
Move the head restraint up or remove it to  
ensure that the child restraint system rests  
When the front passenger seat is occupied,  
check the indicator light in the headliner before  
and while driving.  
169  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to  
page 192.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
For adolescents and adults, the front pass-  
enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat  
positions. In this case, the indicator light for  
the front passenger airbag illuminates in the  
headliner.  
▷
▷
▷
The wrong way warning, refer to page 194.  
No Turn on Red function, refer to page 195.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 196.  
The Intelligent Safety Systems can be acti-  
vated or deactivated on the control display.  
Some functions, e.g., warning times, can be  
configured.  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbag activates and the  
indicator light goes out.  
If it is not possible to establish the desired con-  
dition, have the person sit in the rear seat.  
Safety information  
Occupancy detection  
Warning  
The occupant detection system satisfies the  
legal requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates  
the front passenger airbag under certain con-  
ditions.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Collision warning systems  
Principle  
The Intelligent Safety systems can help pre-  
vent an impending collision. To do so, the area  
around the vehicle is monitored by various  
sensors.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Depending on vehicle equipment, various  
safety and warning systems are available:  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 171.  
▷
▷
The exit warning, refer to page 181.  
The Lane Departure Warning, refer to  
page 183.  
▷
▷
▷
The Lane Change Warning, refer to  
page 186.  
The side collision warning, refer to  
page 189.  
Sensors  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
The rear-cCollision warning, refer to  
page 191.  
170  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Detection capability  
The detection capability of the collision warn-  
ing systems is limited.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
Activating/deactivating/adjusting  
Intelligent Safety systems  
1. To activate/deactivate Intelligent Safety  
systems or configure settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
System limits of the sensors  
The Intelligent Safety systems may be re-  
stricted by the system limits of the sensors.  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings".  
2. Select the desired settings.  
Additional information:  
Depending on national-market version, some  
Intelligent Safety Systems are automatically  
activated whenever you start driving.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning systems  
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle  
outbound delivery.  
Principle  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention can help to prevent accidents within a  
certain speed range. To do so, the area around  
the vehicle is monitored by various sensors.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Reset  
to recommended settings".  
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system  
can help reduce the severity of the accident.  
The system can issue a warning of a possible  
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-  
pendently, if needed. You can cancel automatic  
brake intervention manually, e.g., by actively  
moving the steering wheel.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation system includes the follow-  
ing functions:  
▷
The Rear-end collision warning function,  
refer to page 174.  
▷
The oncoming traffic warning function, refer  
to page 175.  
171  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The oncoming traffic warning function  
when turning, refer to page 176.  
Sensors  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation system is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
The pedestrian warning function, refer to  
page 177.  
The intersection warning function, refer to  
page 179.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
The Evasion Assistant, refer to page 180.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Forward Collision Mitigation can be activated  
or deactivated on the control display. You can  
also configure the warning time. Depending on  
the detected risk of collision, various indicator  
lights and warning lights are displayed on the  
instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Speed range  
The Forward Collision Mitigation system is-  
sues a warning for a possible risk of collision  
at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Safety information  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below this value again.  
Activating/deactivating the Forward  
Collision Mitigation  
Automatic activation of system  
Depending on national-market version, the  
Forward Collision Mitigation is automatically  
activated whenever you start driving.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Activating the system manually  
The Forward Collision Mitigation is activated  
by setting the warning time.  
Additional information:  
Set the warning time for Forward Collision Miti-  
gation, refer to page 173.  
Deactivating the system manually  
Depending on national-market version, you  
must significantly reduce your vehicle's speed  
or stop your vehicle in order to deactivate  
the Forward Collision Mitigation manually. For-  
172  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
ward Collision Mitigation is deactivated via  
iDrive.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the right.  
You may need to successively confirm deacti-  
vation on the control display.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" /  
"Forward Collision Mitigation" / "Off".  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the left.  
General risk of collision.  
Setting the warning time for  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
You can configure the warning time at which  
Forward Collision Mitigation should issue a  
warning.  
Indicator lights and warning lights may be  
displayed differently since the system has de-  
tected multiple objects.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-  
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-  
spective hazardous situation.  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Forward Collision Mitigation".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light  
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-  
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning  
tone sounds.  
The more sensitive the warning time is set to  
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The  
system can therefore also issue more early or  
unfounded warnings and reactions.  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accordance  
with the situation.  
The system checks for visual impairments. De-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster  
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility  
and gaze behavior also affect the timing of  
warnings.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:  
A hazardous situation has been detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Red warning light flashes:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Forward Collision Mitigation is shown on the  
instrument cluster and, depending on vehicle  
equipment, Head-up display by various indica-  
tor lights and warning lights:  
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Automatic brake intervention:  
Depending on the equipment and situation  
in case of risk of imminent collision, the  
system can also intervene with an auto-  
matic brake intervention and automatically  
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a  
complete stop.  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
Risk of collision, for instance with an  
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.  
173  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
Automatic brake intervention  
If there is a risk of collision, the Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation system can assist with an auto-  
matic brake intervention, if necessary.  
System limits of the sensors  
Forward Collision Mitigation may be restricted  
by the system limits of the sensors.  
Additional information:  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient  
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively  
steering.  
Functional limitations  
The Forward Collision Mitigation system may  
be limited in the following situations:  
Depending on the equipment and situation,  
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability control  
systems.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
only a brief brake intervention will occur.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation  
when towing.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Warning function in rear-end  
collision situations  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Principle  
The rear-end collision function warns you of a  
possible collision risk by displaying a warning  
light on the instrument cluster. This system  
also brakes automatically when necessary.  
You can cancel automatic brake intervention  
manually, e.g., by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
Detection capability  
The detection capability of the Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation is restricted.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
The time of warnings may vary depending on  
the current driving situation.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
174  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
With the rear-end collision warning function,  
the following may not be detected or may be  
detected only with a delay in the detection  
range of the sensors, e.g.:  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their  
detection range.  
▷
▷
▷
Preceding vehicle driving slowly and being  
approached at high speed.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Speed range  
The rear-end collision warning function is acti-  
vated when your vehicle speed is greater than  
approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Warning function for  
oncoming traffic  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Principle  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending  
on vehicle equipment.  
The oncoming traffic warning function warns  
you of a possible risk of collision with oncom-  
ing traffic by displaying a warning light on the  
instrument cluster. This system also brakes  
automatically when necessary. You can cancel  
automatic brake intervention manually, e.g., by  
actively moving the steering wheel.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Forward Collision Warning with a de-  
tected vehicle.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General risk of collision.  
The time of warnings may vary depending on  
the current driving situation.  
Warning function  
The rear-end collision warning function issues  
warnings on different levels, depending on  
the respective hazard situation. This system  
prompts the driver to intervene manually.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.  
175  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their  
detection range.  
With the oncoming traffic warning function, the  
following may not be detected or may be de-  
tected only with a delay in the detection range  
of the sensors, e.g.:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Speed range  
The oncoming traffic warning is activated  
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Warning function for turning  
with oncoming traffic  
Principle  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The warning function for turning with oncom-  
ing traffic warns you of a possible risk of col-  
lision with oncoming traffic by displaying a  
warning light on the instrument cluster. This  
system also brakes automatically when nec-  
essary. You can cancel automatic brake inter-  
vention manually, e.g., by actively moving the  
steering wheel.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending  
on vehicle equipment.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General risk of collision.  
The time of warnings may vary depending on  
the current driving situation.  
Warning function  
The oncoming traffic warning function issues  
warnings on different levels, depending on  
the respective hazard situation. This system  
prompts the driver to intervene manually.  
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake  
intervention is triggered.  
Additional information:  
176  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their  
detection range.  
With the warning function for turning with on-  
coming traffic, the following may not be de-  
tected or may be detected only with a delay in  
the detection range of the sensors, e.g.:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Speed range  
The warning function for turning is activated  
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Warning function for  
pedestrians  
This system reacts when your vehicle speed is  
less than approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.  
Principle  
The Pedestrian Warning system warns you of  
a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists by displaying a warning light on the  
instrument cluster. This system also brakes  
automatically when necessary. You can cancel  
automatic brake intervention manually, e.g., by  
actively moving the steering wheel.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending  
on vehicle equipment.  
Icon  
Meaning  
The system issues warnings for speeds that  
are common in towns and cities.  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function  
The warning function for turning with oncom-  
ing traffic issues warnings on different levels,  
depending on the respective hazard. This sys-  
tem prompts the driver to intervene manually.  
Additional information:  
177  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their  
detection range on a straight road.  
The Pedestrian Warning system issues warn-  
ings on different levels, depending on the  
respective hazard situation. This system  
prompts the driver to intervene manually.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
In addition, the sensors detect the traffic situa-  
tion in their detection range when turning.  
Detection range  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Speed range  
The Pedestrian Warning function is activated  
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this system  
reacts when your vehicle speed is less than  
approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
With the Pedestrian Warning, the sensor de-  
tection range consists of the following:  
▷
▷
From area in front of vehicle, arrow 1.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If vehicle is equipped with front, side radar  
sensors, side areas, arrows 2.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is shown  
on the instrument cluster and Head-up display,  
depending on vehicle equipment.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
178  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
Speed range  
The Intersection Warning is activated when  
your vehicle speed is greater than approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Warning function at  
intersections  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Principle  
The Intersection Warning function warns you  
of a possible risk of collision with crossing  
traffic by displaying a warning light on the in-  
strument cluster. This system also brakes au-  
tomatically when necessary. You can cancel  
automatic brake intervention manually, e.g., by  
actively moving the steering wheel.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending  
on vehicle equipment.  
Icon  
Meaning  
At intersections and junctions, this system is-  
sues warnings for speeds that are common in  
towns and cities.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the right.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the left.  
The time of warnings may vary depending on  
the current driving situation.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function  
The Intersection Warning system issues warn-  
ings on different levels, depending on the  
respective hazard. This system prompts the  
driver to intervene manually.  
Additional information:  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their  
detection range.  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.  
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be  
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-  
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
179  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Detection range  
Safety information  
With the Intersection Warning function, the fol-  
lowing may not be detected or may be de-  
tected only with a delay in the detection range  
of the sensors, e.g.:  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the Evasion Assistant:  
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-  
tions.  
Sensors have detected sufficient clearance  
around the vehicle.  
Speed range  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver  
when the vehicle speed is between approx.  
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.  
Evasion Assistant  
Principle  
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-  
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear  
suddenly. This system intervenes actively to  
assist the driver if it is possible to make an  
evasive maneuver to the side.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or person, e.g., a pedestrian, a warning  
light is shown on the instrument cluster and  
Head-up display, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment.  
If the system detects sufficient free space  
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-  
form an evasive maneuver safely.  
Icon  
Meaning  
The system warns the driver of a possible risk  
of collision by displaying various warning lights  
on the instrument cluster.  
Warning when a vehicle is detected.  
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.  
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-  
cle.  
Warning function with evasion  
support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at a  
high differential speed, a warning is displayed  
if there is an immediate risk of collision.  
The sensors monitor and detect the clearance  
in front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehi-  
cle equipment, the areas next to the vehicle  
are also monitored.  
Intervene in case of a warning.  
The system is designed to provide assistance  
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk  
of collision.  
180  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-  
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-  
play signals the evasion support.  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by var-  
ious warnings, e.g., warning light on the exte-  
rior mirror and a warning tone.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives  
warnings at different levels.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
With the Evasion Assistant, the following may  
not be detected in the sensor detection range,  
e.g.:  
▷
Preceding vehicle driving slowly and being  
approached at high speed.  
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehi-  
cle.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
The Exit Warning can be activated or deacti-  
vated on the control display.  
The warning function can also be configured  
depending on national-market version.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Functional limitation  
This system is deactivated when the trailer  
power socket is occupied or trailer towing is  
activated, e.g., when using a trailer or rear bi-  
cycle rack.  
Sensors  
The Exit Warning is controlled by the following  
sensors:  
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Depending on whether vehicle is equipped  
with side front radar sensors.  
Exit warning  
Principle  
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.  
Activating/deactivating the exit  
warning  
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-  
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.  
When opening doors, vehicle occupants are  
then warned if a risk of collision with an ap-  
proaching object is detected.  
Automatic activation of system  
The exit warning activates automatically  
whenever you start driving if this function was  
switched on when you completed your last trip.  
181  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating the system manually  
Displays  
1. To deactivate the Exit Warning, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit  
warning".  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on national-market version, this  
system activates automatically at the start of  
every drive.  
Configuring the exit warning  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
1. To configure the Exit Warning, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit  
warning".  
Ambient light  
Depending on the equipment, warnings are  
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-  
rior.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on national-market version, it may  
not be possible to configure the warning func-  
tion.  
Warning function  
Turning the warning signal on/off  
Prewarning  
To turn the Exit Warning tone on/off,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit  
warning" / "Warning tone".  
In the event of a prewarning for the Exit Warn-  
ing, the warning light on the exterior mirror il-  
luminates. Depending on the equipment, the  
ambient light also flashes.  
An object was detected in the opening area of  
the doors. Increased awareness is required.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
warning tone cannot be turned off.  
Acute warning  
In the event of an acute Exit Warning, the  
warning light on the exterior mirror flashes, as  
does the ambient light, depending on vehicle  
equipment. In addition, a warning tone sounds.  
There is a risk of collision when opening the  
doors.  
182  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Detection range  
With the Exit Warning, the following may not  
be identified in the sensor detection range,  
e.g.:  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their  
detection range.  
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.  
Stationary or very slow objects.  
Pedestrians.  
The Lane Departure Warning can be activated,  
deactivated and set on the control display.  
Various warning functions from this system  
help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.  
Functional limitations  
The exit warning system may be restricted in  
the following situations:  
If you set your turn signal for the correspond-  
ing direction before leaving your lane, no warn-  
ings are displayed.  
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too  
fast or too slow.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
In curves.  
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
road and traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate Do not jerk the steering  
wheel in response to a warning.  
Lane Departure Warning  
with active return  
Principle  
The Lane Departure Warning system with ac-  
tive return alerts the driver when their vehicle is  
about to leave the road or lane.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
183  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Lane  
Departure Warning" / "Off".  
Functional requirement  
For the Lane Departure Warning to activate,  
the camera must detect the lane boundary.  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
The Lane Departure Warning menu can be  
used to configure this function and specify  
when it should issue warnings.  
Speed range  
The Lane Departure Warning is activated  
when your vehicle exceeds a given minimum  
speed. The minimum speed is country-specific  
and displayed on the control display.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Lane Departure Warning".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Sensors  
▷
"Expanded"  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Lane  
Departure Warning system is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
If the system detects that your vehicle  
is about to leave your lane or cross a  
lane marking, a warning is issued. The  
system performs a steering intervention.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
▷
"In dangerous situations"  
Side radar sensors, front.  
A warning is issued if the system de-  
tects that the vehicle is about to inad-  
vertently cross a lane marking, or if the  
sensors detect an oncoming vehicle. A  
steering intervention is performed.  
Activating/deactivating the Lane  
Departure Warning  
Automatic activation of system  
Depending on national-market version, the  
system is automatically activated whenever  
you start driving.  
Depending on national-market version,  
with continuous lane markings: If the  
system detects that your vehicle is  
about to inadvertently leave your lane  
or cross a lane marking, a warning is  
issued. A steering intervention is per-  
formed.  
Activating the system manually  
The Lane Departure Warning is activated by  
setting the warning time.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration  
intensity, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback  
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".  
Additional information:  
Configuring the Lane Departure Warning, refer  
to page 184.  
Deactivating the system manually  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, you must successively confirm  
deactivation of the Lane Departure Warning on  
the control display.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
184  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Steering intervention.  
Warning tone.  
Depending on national-market  
version: activate/deactivate steering  
intervention  
Depending on national-market version, the  
Lane Departure Warning steering intervention  
can be activated or deactivated.  
Steering wheel vibration  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Lane  
Departure Warning" / "Steering intervention".  
Additionally, a light is displayed on the instru-  
ment cluster.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
Steering intervention  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version: The Lane Departure Warning  
system may intervene with an active steer-  
ing intervention in addition to vibration if  
you cross a lane marking at speeds up to  
130 mph/210 km/h. The system supports the  
driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
The steering intervention can be noticed on  
the steering wheel and can be manually over-  
ridden at any time.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, different warnings are dis-  
played on the instrument cluster for the Lane  
Departure Warning.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is actively issuing a warning. If neces-  
sary, the system performs a steering  
intervention.  
During an active steering intervention, a light is  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
Warning function  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
General information  
Different warnings are issued by the Lane De-  
parture Warning system, depending on situa-  
tion and speed:  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
▷
Indicator lights and warning lights on the  
instrument cluster.  
▷
Vibration of steering wheel.  
185  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
End of warning  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
The warning or active steering intervention will  
be canceled in the following situations, for ex-  
ample:  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The Lane Departure Warning system may be  
restricted in the following situations:  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
When no lane markings are detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
Warning signal  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
A warning tone sounds if the driver does  
not actively steer after the Lane Departure  
Warning system has performed multiple active  
steering interventions within one minute.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
The warning tone and Check Control message  
advise the driver to pay closer attention to their  
lane.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
on the instrument cluster when this system is  
not functioning properly. A yellow warning light  
also illuminates on the instrument cluster, de-  
pending on national-market version.  
The longer warning tone is stopped if the  
driver takes control of the steering.  
With trailer towing  
When the Lane Departure Warning is acti-  
vated, no steering intervention is performed if  
the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer  
towing is activated, e.g., when using a trailer.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
with active return  
If using a rear carrier, e.g., a rear bicycle rack,  
on the trailer hitch, this restriction does not  
apply when trailer towing is activated on the  
control display.  
Principle  
The Lane Change Warning system with active  
return detects vehicles in your blind spot or ve-  
186  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
hicles approaching from behind in the adjacent  
lane.  
Speed range  
Active Blind Spot Detection is activated when  
your vehicle exceeds a given minimum speed.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection  
menu.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-  
ous warnings, e.g., signaled by warning light  
on the exterior mirror.  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not  
vibrate.  
This system is temporarily deactivated  
at speeds greater than approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
Activating/deactivating the Lane  
Change Warning  
1. To activate/deactivate Active Blind Spot  
Detection, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Active Blind Spot Detection".  
The sensors monitor the area behind and next  
to the vehicle.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The system will warn in the previously named  
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-  
ing light on the exterior mirror flashes and the  
steering wheel vibrates at the set intensity.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Blind Spot Detection ac-  
tivates automatically whenever you start driv-  
ing.  
Active Blind Spot Detection can be activated,  
deactivated, and configured on the control dis-  
play.  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
1. To configure Active Blind Spot Detec-  
tion, go through the menu as fol-  
Safety information  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Active Blind Spot Detection".  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Active Blind Spot Detection is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
You can configure how many warnings will be  
shown. However, there may also be an excess  
of unwarranted warnings of critical situations.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Depending on whether vehicle is equipped  
with side front radar sensors.  
187  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Acute warning  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration  
intensity, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback  
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".  
When an acute warning is issued by Active  
Blind Spot Detection, the steering wheel vi-  
brates briefly. The warning light in the exterior  
mirror flashes brightly.  
An acute warning is issued if the following con-  
ditions are met:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Your own vehicle is approaching the other  
lane.  
Depending on national-market  
version: activate/deactivate steering  
intervention  
Depending on national-market version, the  
Lane Change Warning steering intervention  
can be activated or deactivated.  
Depending on the system setting when the  
turn signal is turned on.  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on national-market version: The  
Active Blind Spot Detection system may per-  
form an active steering intervention when  
there is no response to the steering wheel  
vibration and a lane marking is crossed at  
speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h. The steer-  
ing intervention helps return the vehicle into  
the lane. The steering intervention can be no-  
ticed on the steering wheel and can be man-  
ually overridden at any time.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Active  
Blind Spot Detection" / "Steering intervention".  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
The steering intervention is carried out from  
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-  
played on the control display.  
With trailer towing  
No steering intervention is performed when the  
trailer power socket is occupied or trailer tow-  
ing is activated. Active Blind Spot Detection  
does not issue a pre-warning.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, an acute warning will continue  
to be issued if there is a risk of collision.  
Prewarning  
In the event of a prewarning for Active Blind  
Spot Detection, the dimmed warning light on  
the exterior mirror indicates when vehicles are  
in your blind spot or approaching from the rear.  
The warning function may be restricted. Warn-  
ings can be displayed late or not at all, e.g., if  
the speed of the approaching vehicle is much  
higher than your own speed. An increased  
188  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
number of unwarranted warnings may occur.  
A Check Control message is displayed on the  
instrument cluster.  
also illuminates on the instrument cluster, de-  
pending on national-market version.  
This system may be restricted or deactivated  
when the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, e.g., when using a  
trailer or rear bicycle rack. A Check Control  
message is displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Warning light flashing  
As a self-test of Active Blind Spot Detection,  
the warning light on the exterior mirror flashes  
briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.  
System limits  
Side collision mitigation  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
Functional limitations  
The Lane Change Warning system may be re-  
stricted in the following situations:  
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next  
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision  
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-  
lision. To do so, the system issues a warning  
by flashing the warning light on the exterior  
mirror, issuing a Check Control message, and  
vibrating the steering wheel.  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
If necessary, an active steering intervention is  
performed by the system.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-  
tions:  
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
The sensors monitor the space next to the ve-  
hicle.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
The side-collision warning can be activated  
or deactivated on the control display. The se-  
verity of the steering wheel vibration can be  
adjusted.  
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
on the instrument cluster when this system is  
not functioning properly. A yellow warning light  
189  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield determines  
the lane boundary positions.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Side Collision Warning infor-  
mation is displayed in the Assisted View on the  
instrument cluster.  
For the side-collision warning with steering in-  
tervention to activate, the camera must detect  
the lane boundary.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
Speed range  
Warning function  
The side-collision warning function is activated  
when your vehicle exceeds a given minimum  
speed. The minimum speed is country-specific  
and displayed on the control display.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
This system responds when your vehicle  
speed is less than approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
Sensors  
The side-collision warning is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Activating/deactivating the side-  
collision warning  
1. To activate/deactivate the Side Collision  
Warning, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Side Collision Protection".  
Acute warning  
In the event of an acute side-collision warning,  
the warning light on the exterior mirror flashes  
and the steering wheel begins to vibrate if  
there is a risk of collision.  
A Check Control message is displayed on the  
instrument cluster at the same time.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Steering intervention  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration  
intensity, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback  
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".  
Depending on the national-market version,  
if necessary, the system engages the active  
steering intervention to prevent a collision and  
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
190  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
PreCrash functions are triggered where appli-  
cable if a vehicle approaching at a certain  
speed is detected.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The side-collision warning system may be re-  
stricted in the following situations:  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehi-  
cle.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
The rear-end collision preparation function is  
activated automatically when you start driving  
and is deactivated automatically in certain sit-  
uations.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed on  
the instrument cluster when this system is not  
functioning properly.  
Sensors  
The rear-end collision preparation function is  
controlled by the side, rear radar sensors.  
This system is deactivated when the trailer  
power socket is occupied or trailer towing is  
activated, e.g., when using a trailer or rear  
bicycle rack. A Check Control message is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
Activating/deactivating the rear-  
collision warning  
The rear-collision warning is automatically ac-  
tivated whenever you start driving.  
The system is deactivated in the following sit-  
uations:  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
▷
▷
When reversing.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied  
or trailer towing is activated, e.g., when us-  
ing a trailer or rear bicycle rack.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on and  
191  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional requirement  
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle  
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or  
light signal systems.  
Functional limitations  
The rear-collision warning may be restricted if  
the speed of the approaching vehicle is much  
higher or similar to your own speed.  
Various traffic signs are taken into account for  
the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:  
Sign Meaning  
Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning  
Give way signs:  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Principle  
Stop signs:  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides  
support in situations in which the right-of-way  
needs to be yielded based on road signs or  
traffic lights.  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
When traffic lights are red, a pre-  
warning and an acute warning will be  
issued.  
This system uses a camera to analyze traffic  
signs and traffic lights. The navigation system  
directs information on the road layout to the  
system.  
Speed range  
For warning purposes, the respective traffic sit-  
uation, for example, is displayed on the instru-  
ment cluster. An acoustic signal also sounds in  
acute warning situations.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system  
issues a warning as from a variable mini-  
mum speed and at speeds up to approx.  
60 mph/100 km/h.  
A warning is given if the right of way is about  
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-  
tions:  
Sensors  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning is control-  
led by the camera behind the windshield.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At an intersection.  
At a road entrance.  
Activating/deactivating the Traffic  
Light And Sign Warning  
1. To activate/deactivate the Traffic Light And  
Sign Warning, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Traffic Light and Sign  
Warning".  
On a highway entrance ramp.  
At a roundabout.  
With a red traffic light.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning can be ac-  
tivated or deactivated on the control display.  
You can also configure the warning time.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
192  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Setting the warning time for the  
Traffic Light And Sign Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
Give way.  
1. To configure the warning time for the Traf-  
fic Light And Sign Warning, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Safety and warnings" / "Traffic Light and  
Sign Warning".  
Stop.  
Red traffic light.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The selected setting is saved and adopted for  
the next journey.  
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
Warning function  
General information  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system is-  
sues warnings in two levels.  
Acute warning  
If an acute warning is issued for the Traffic  
Light And Sign Warning because there is a risk  
that a vehicle is not yielding the right-of-way, a  
signal tone sounds and an icon is displayed on  
the instrument cluster:  
In the event of a prewarning, the system issues  
a warning by means of an icon on the instru-  
ment cluster.  
In the event of an acute warning, the system  
issues a warning by displaying an icon on the  
instrument cluster and sounding an acoustic  
signal.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Red traffic light.  
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-  
tual driving situation and the warning time set-  
ting.  
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
Prewarning  
If a prewarning is issued for the Traffic Light  
And Sign Warning because there is a risk that  
a vehicle is not yielding the right-of-way, an  
icon is displayed on the instrument cluster:  
Display in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Traffic  
Light And Sign Warning is displayed simulta-  
neously on the Head-up display and instru-  
ment cluster.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
193  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
No warning  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning does not  
issue a warning in the following situations, for  
example:  
Wrong way warning  
Principle  
The wrong way warning warns the driver of  
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-  
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-  
way streets.  
▷
In right-of-way situations without right-of-  
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal  
systems.  
▷
With intersections with relevant traffic lights  
that are illuminated yellow or green.  
The system uses sensors and, depending on  
vehicle equipment, navigation data and traffic  
signs to monitor the traffic situation.  
Functional limitations  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system  
may be limited in the following situations:  
For warning purposes, a corresponding traffic  
sign is displayed on the instrument cluster and  
an acoustic signal sounds.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
Functional requirement  
The road layout ahead must be controlled  
clearly with traffic signs.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
The Wrong Way Warning system recognizes  
the following traffic signs, for example:  
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
▷
▷
▷
No entrance.  
Roundabout.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Direction arrows for required passing ma-  
neuver.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
Sensors  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
The Wrong Way Warning function is controlled  
by the camera behind the windshield.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Activating/deactivating the wrong  
way warning  
Depending on national-market version, the  
wrong way warning is automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
In some regions, the system may not be  
available or only partially available.  
194  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Warning function  
The Wrong Way Warning is displayed  
It may not be possible to use the system in  
all regions.  
and an acoustic signal sounds when  
your vehicle is traveling in the wrong di-  
rection on a highway, roundabout, or one-way  
street, for example.  
No Turn on Red function  
Warnings are displayed on the instrument  
cluster and, depending on vehicle equipment,  
on the Head-up display.  
Principle  
The No Turn on Red function assists the driver  
by indicating at which traffic lights turning on  
red is prohibited.  
System limits  
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights  
and traffic signs using the camera behind the  
windshield. In addition, the navigation system  
data is used.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
No warning  
For example, the wrong way warning system  
does not issue warnings for roadways without  
traffic signs.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
the No Turn on Red function:  
Functional limitations  
The wrong way warning system may be re-  
stricted in the following situations, for example,  
and will either output an incorrect wrong way  
warning or no warning at all:  
▷
The system detects the right-of-way situa-  
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and  
traffic signs.  
▷
▷
When the signage is not clear.  
▷
▷
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m  
from the traffic lights.  
If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-  
cealed or soiled.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Traf-  
fic Light And Sign Warning is activated.  
▷
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-  
tated.  
▷
▷
If the traffic signs are too small or too large.  
Sensors  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
The No Turn on Red function is controlled by  
the camera behind the windshield.  
▷
▷
▷
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
If the driver approaches a red traffic  
light with a traffic sign that prohibits  
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
195  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light goes out automatically after  
you drive off at a speed greater than approx.  
9 mph/15 km/h.  
The driver can manually cancel the Emergency  
Stop Assistant at any time.  
Safety information  
System limits  
Warning  
General information  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The No Turn on Red function may be limited in  
the following situations, for example:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the Emergency Stop Assistant:  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
▷
▷
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated  
via iDrive.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
The system is activated from a speed of  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver  
activity.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Activating/deactivating Emergency  
Stop Assistant  
To activate/deactivate triggering of the Emer-  
gency Stop Assistant, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Emergency stop".  
In some regions, this function may not be  
completely available or not available at all.  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
If the Emergency Stop Assistant detects that  
the driver is no longer driving their vehicle  
safely or is ignoring warnings, the system is  
triggered automatically. The triggered system  
is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Principle  
The Emergency Stop Assistant assists the  
driver if they are no longer able to drive their  
vehicle safely. When the system is triggered,  
the vehicle is brought to a stop in its own lane  
by the lane keeping system.  
Triggering of the Emergency Stop Assistant  
can be enabled or disabled on the control dis-  
play.  
An immediate emergency call can be triggered  
on the control display.  
196  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The following is performed automatically when  
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When triggered, the Emergency Stop Assistant  
is shown on the instrument cluster.  
▷
A display is shown on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Icon  
Meaning  
▷
The system takes over vehicle handling un-  
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant has  
triggered.  
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.  
An emergency call is triggered when sta-  
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.  
System limits  
The Emergency Stop Assistant does not re-  
lease the driver from their obligation to drive  
safely in traffic.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be  
triggered via voice input.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 56.  
This system may be restricted in the following  
situations:  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-  
sistant at any point by taking active control of  
driving the vehicle.  
▷
When wearing sunglasses with high protec-  
tion against infrared light.  
Cross Traffic Warning with  
brake intervention  
The system is stopped by the following ac-  
tions, for example:  
▷
▷
By firmly pressing the accelerator pedal.  
By stopping the system on the control dis-  
play.  
Principle  
The Cross Traffic Warning with brake interven-  
tion helps the driver by providing visual and  
acoustic warnings when driving through con-  
fusing exits or pulling out of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
By operating the turn signal.  
By turning off the hazard warning system.  
By firmly countersteering.  
By changing the selector lever position  
when the vehicle was already at a stand-  
still.  
The system detects road users approaching  
from the side earlier than would be possible  
from the driver’s seat.  
If there is a risk of collision when reversing, this  
system provides assistance by performing an  
automatic brake intervention.  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the Emer-  
gency Stop Assistant will apply the following  
settings:  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
The interior lights are switched on.  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
197  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Depending on whether vehicle is equipped  
with side front radar sensors.  
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic  
Warning  
The system must be activated on the control  
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake  
intervention to switch on automatically.  
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehi-  
cle.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking".  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well.  
2. Select the desired setting, depending on  
vehicle equipment:  
The system displays a warning light on the  
exterior mirror, for example, when other road  
users are approaching.  
▷
▷
▷
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
"Brake intervention at rear"  
The Cross Traffic Warning can be activated or  
deactivated on the control display.  
Turning on the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The cross traffic warning must be activated on  
the control display. The system turns on auto-  
matically as soon as Park Distance Control or a  
camera view activates and you engage a gear  
position.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the equipment, the front system  
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active when the vehi-  
cle is started.  
Turning off the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The Cross Traffic Warning switches off auto-  
matically in the following situations, for exam-  
ple:  
Sensors  
▷
▷
When walking speed is exceeded.  
The Cross Traffic Warning is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
198  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display in camera view  
Warning function  
General information  
With the Cross Traffic Warning, the control dis-  
play shows the corresponding view, an acous-  
tic signal may sound, and the warning light on  
the exterior mirror flashes.  
In case of a brake intervention, a message is  
displayed on the control display and close after  
a brief period of time.  
Depending on the direction of travel, the view  
to the front or back is displayed in the camera  
image.  
Visual warning  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning of the Cross  
Traffic Warning function, an acoustic signal  
sounds if your vehicle moves in the corre-  
sponding direction.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
signal tone will already sound when the gear  
position is engaged.  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
The Cross Traffic Warning may be restricted by  
the system limits of the sensors.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The Cross Traffic Warning system may be re-  
stricted in the following situations:  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
199  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
If the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, the cross traffic  
warning is not available for the area behind  
the vehicle.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
BMW Drive Recorder  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video  
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic. To do so, you  
must activate the system on the control display  
before using it for the first time.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Data protection  
You can use the control display to configure  
video recording settings such as recording type  
and duration.  
The BMW Drive Recorder is permitted to re-  
cord and evaluate video recordings in accord-  
ance with the statutory regulations of the  
country in which the system is to be used. The  
user is responsible for the use of the system  
and compliance with respective applicable reg-  
ulations.  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
▷
Automatic storage of recordings makes it  
possible to document the vehicle accident  
or theft using the corresponding recording  
type configured.  
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory  
restrictions on using the system in your region  
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the  
laws with respect to use of the system should  
be verified in regular intervals, especially when  
borders are frequently crossed.  
▷
Saving recordings manually helps you  
document traffic situations using your set  
recording type.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, video re-  
cordings can be saved directly to a mobile de-  
vice, e.g., a smartphone or USB stick.  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, you should in-  
form others about the system when giving  
them the vehicle.  
Assistance system cameras are used to re-  
cord, e.g., panorama view cameras.  
In addition, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the BMW Drive Recorder:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.  
Time.  
Speed.  
▷
Standby or drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
GPS coordinates.  
▷
▷
The BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
200  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The recording type has been selected.  
gered. Recordings are stored depending on  
the setting selected for recording duration.  
The recording duration has been selected.  
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-  
sage is sent to the My BMW App.  
The following functional requirements apply  
when using the theft alert:  
After saving the recording, the reduced  
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-  
bile device.  
▷
The theft notification was activated in the  
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-  
corder menu.  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic  
recording may be taken.  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
The My BMW App is installed on the mobile  
device.  
Starting/stopping manual recording  
▷
▷
The My BMW app is linked to the Connect-  
edDrive account.  
Using the button  
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
You must activate the BMW Drive Recorder on  
the control display before using the recording  
function for the first time.  
1. Go to the Apps menu.  
2. "All"  
To start a manual recording with the  
BMW Drive Recorder, press and hold  
the parking assistance button on the  
center console.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. Accept the Privacy Policy.  
5. "Settings"  
6. "Allow recording"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Recordings are made for the set recording du-  
ration or can be ended manually on the control  
display.  
Recording functions  
Via iDrive  
Starting/stopping an automatic  
recording  
If the vehicle sensors detect an accident or  
theft, the BMW Drive Recorder starts recording  
automatically and then saves this recording.  
To start recording with BMW Drive Recorder in  
the vehicle, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" / "Start  
recording" / "Vehicle".  
Recordings are made for the set recording du-  
ration and can be stopped manually by rese-  
lecting the menu item on the control display.  
▷
In the event of an accident, the BMW Drive  
Recorder saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
▷
In the event of theft, the BMW Drive Re-  
corder saves recordings after being trig-  
201  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Video recordings saved by the BMW Drive Re-  
corder can be played, exported, and deleted.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
the BMW Drive Recorder when recording on a  
mobile device:  
▷
▷
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
The BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
For your own safety, video recordings are  
only shown on the control display if the ve-  
hicle speed is below approx. 2 mph/3 km/h.  
Depending on national-market version, video  
recordings are only shown when the parking  
brake is applied or selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
To send recordings to a mobile device, the fol-  
lowing functional requirements apply for the  
BMW Drive Recorder:  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, pair a  
mobile device with the vehicle via Wi-Fi and  
Bluetooth audio, or connect a USB stick.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" / "Record  
-ings".  
▷
▷
▷
The My BMW App is installed on the mobile  
device.  
2. Select the desired recording.  
3. If necessary, select the camera.  
The My BMW app is linked to the Connect-  
edDrive account.  
The My BMW App is permitted to access  
your photo library.  
Settings  
Recording type  
Starting/ending recording  
1. To select the recording type for BMW Drive  
Recorder, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /  
"Settings".  
To start recording with BMW Drive Recorder  
on a mobile device, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /  
"Start recording" / "USB/My BMW app".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Recordings can be stopped manually by rese-  
lecting the menu item on the control display.  
Recording time  
1. To configure the recording time for BMW  
Drive Recorder, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive  
Recorder" / "Settings".  
Cameras  
You can select any camera of the BMW Drive  
Recorder.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /  
"Settings" / "Camera selection".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Recording on a mobile device  
General information  
Depending on national-market version, the  
storable video length depends on the mobile  
device's available storage space.  
2. Select your desired camera.  
System limits  
In the event of serious accidents, the BMW  
Drive Recorder may not be able to store re-  
cordings if the damage to the vehicle is too  
great or the power supply was interrupted.  
202  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
With USB sticks that have been repeatedly  
overwritten, it may only be possible to export  
recordings in a limited manner.  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic brake intervention by Forward  
Collision Mitigation.  
Brake power assistance provided by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation.  
The preferred file system for USB storage is  
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.  
Detection of an impending rear collision by  
the Rear-collision warning.  
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-  
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system  
has been triggered.  
Safety information  
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be  
established, theft alerts and video downloads  
may be restricted or not available.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, critical situations might not be  
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects  
whether recordings can be saved on your  
smartphone. This function may be restricted or  
not available if the connection is weak.  
Active Protection  
Principle  
PreCrash functions  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving  
situations.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and require-  
ments, Active Protection activates the follow-  
ing individual functions in critical driving situa-  
tions:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Protection consists of  
various PreCrash functions.  
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.  
The windows remain open with a small  
gap.  
Active Protection is used to detect certain criti-  
cal driving situations that might lead to an acci-  
dent. This includes the following critical driving  
situations:  
▷
▷
Automatic closing of glass sunroof.  
Automatic positioning of the backrest for  
the front passenger seat.  
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
Systems can be returned to the desired set-  
tings following a critical driving situation with-  
out accident.  
General information  
Certain functions of some vehicle systems can  
lead to Active Protection being triggered within  
their system limits:  
PostCrash iBrake  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, PostCrash iBrake  
can automatically bring the vehicle to a stop  
without any need for the driver to intervene.  
This can reduce the risk of a further collision.  
203  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Safety information  
The driver can intervene manually to brake the  
vehicle more sharply or cancel automatic brak-  
ing with PostCrash iBrake.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than  
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
than the brake pressure generated by auto-  
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-  
Crash iBrake is canceled.  
Break recommendation  
Function  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,  
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.  
After starting a journey, the break recommen-  
dation function is trained to the driver, enabling  
it to detect decreasing alertness or fatigue.  
This process takes the following criteria into  
account:  
Automatic braking can be canceled by doing  
as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav-  
ior.  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
Driving conditions, e.g., the time or duration  
of the drive.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, informa-  
tion from the Driver Attention Camera.  
This function activates at speeds greater than  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display  
a break recommendation.  
Fatigue alert  
Principle  
Setting break recommendation  
The Distraction Warning from the Fatigue Alert  
system can be turned on or off or configured.  
The Fatigue Alert system can detect when the  
driver is less alert using various criteria.  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation func-  
tion can detect driver fatigue, e.g., during long,  
monotonous trips. This function recommends  
taking a break as necessary. A message will  
appear on the control display.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Fatigue Alert".  
The break recommendation can be adjusted  
on the control display.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Despite this function being off, some driver as-  
sistance systems may issue break recommen-  
dations.  
204  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Functional requirements  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, the  
Fatigue Alert system displays a message on  
the control display, recommending the driver to  
take a break.  
For full operability, make sure that the field of  
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-  
structed.  
The steering wheel and driver’s seat height  
must be adjusted so that the entire instrument  
cluster is visible. This enables the Driver Atten-  
tion Camera to record the driver’s entire face.  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
Overview  
System limits  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If  
the system is limited, either no warning may  
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be  
issued.  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-  
ment cluster may have some infrared light  
sources. Depending on the light conditions,  
these light sources can be visible when the  
vehicle is in standby mode.  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
operational in the following situations:  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
▷
When wearing sunglasses with high protec-  
tion against infrared light.  
Driver Attention Camera  
Principle  
The Driver Attention Camera is a camera on  
the instrument cluster. The camera monitors  
the driver’s activity and direction of view, de-  
pending on vehicle equipment.  
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-  
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,  
by evaluating their head position and eyes.  
205  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Principle  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep your ve-  
hicle safely on the road in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depending  
on the situation, and wheels can be braked  
individually. This system can be activated or  
deactivated via My Modes.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
The Antilock Braking System activates auto-  
matically whenever drive-ready state is turned  
on.  
Dynamic Stability Control will detect the follow-  
ing unstable driving conditions, for example:  
▷
Skidding at the vehicle rear, which can lead  
to oversteering.  
Malfunction  
The Antilock Braking System warning  
light illuminates continuously on the in-  
strument cluster if the system is not  
operational.  
▷
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
Safety information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
206  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
If the Dynamic Stability Control  
is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Overview  
If the OFF indicator light for Dynamic  
Stability Control illuminates, the system  
is deactivated.  
If the warning light for Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control flashes, the system is regu-  
lating the drive and brake power. The  
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce the vehicle speed  
and adjust your driving style to the road condi-  
tions.  
The My Modes button located on the  
center console.  
If the warning light for Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control illuminates, the system has  
failed or is initializing. Driving stabiliza-  
tion is restricted or has failed.  
Activating/deactivating Dynamic  
Stability Control  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
1.  
Press the My Modes button on the  
center console.  
2. "SPORT"  
The last Dynamic Stability Control setting  
Setting for increased driving  
dynamics  
Principle  
For a more dynamic driving experience, you  
can increase the driving dynamics via My  
Modes.  
applied in this mode is activated.  
3.  
Tap the settings icon as necessary.  
4. "Driving dynamics"  
5. "DSC OFF"  
Dynamic Stability Control, and thus driving sta-  
bility, are limited while accelerating and corner-  
ing.  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
Dynamic Stability Control activates automati-  
cally when you switch to another drive mode.  
207  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
nates when increased driving dynamics is acti-  
vated.  
Overview  
Automatic program change  
Increased driving dynamics deactivates auto-  
matically in the following situations, for exam-  
ple:  
▷
▷
When Distance Control is activated.  
In case of a brake intervention by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-  
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
The My Modes button for activat-  
ing/deactivating increased driving dy-  
namics is located on the center con-  
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.  
The vehicle has a flat tire.  
sole.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 171.  
Functional requirement  
To increase driving dynamics, you must se-  
lect the following drive mode via My Modes:  
"SPORT".  
Drive-off support  
Activating/deactivating increased  
driving dynamics  
Principle  
Drive-off support provides the best possible  
traction when driving off in certain situations,  
e.g., on difficult surfaces like snow or sand.  
1.  
To activate/deactivate increased  
driving dynamics, press the My Modes but-  
ton on the center console.  
This function ensures maximum drive power at  
low speeds with adapted driving stability.  
2. "SPORT"  
The last Dynamic Stability Control setting  
Activating/deactivating the drive-off  
support  
To activate/deactivate drive-off support, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain and  
chassis" / "Activate drive-off support once".  
applied in this mode is activated.  
3.  
Select the settings icon.  
4. "Driving dynamics"  
5. "SPORT PLUS"  
Increased driving dynamics is activated.  
Drive-off support remains on until it is deacti-  
vated or the driving mode is changed.  
Dynamic Stability Control automatically reacti-  
vates when changing to another drive mode.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If drive-off support is activated, the  
drive-off support indicator light illumi-  
nates on the instrument cluster.  
The Dynamic Stability Control indicator  
light on the instrument cluster illumi-  
208  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Hill Descent Control".  
BMW xDrive  
Hill Descent Control is automatically disabled  
at speeds above approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system  
of the vehicle. The interplay between BMW  
xDrive and other suspension control systems  
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-  
mizes traction and driving dynamics.  
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the ve-  
hicle speed, the following functions are deacti-  
vated:  
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive  
forces to the front and rear axles as required  
by the driving situation and road conditions.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Active Park Distance Control emergency  
braking.  
Additional information:  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 171.  
Hill Descent Control  
▷
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 253.  
Principle  
Hill Descent Control is a downhill control fea-  
ture for vehicles with all-wheel drive. This fea-  
ture adjusts the vehicle speed on steep down-  
hill gradients, e.g., when driving on unpaved  
roads.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The set speed is displayed on  
the instrument cluster together  
with the indicator light for Hill  
Descent Control.  
When Hill Descent Control is on, the vehicle  
moves at the speed set by the driver, without  
the driver having to depress the brake pedal.  
▷
The display illuminates green  
when the system is on. Hill  
Descent Control decelerates  
the vehicle.  
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the  
speed, it automatically distributes the brake  
power to the individual wheels. Driving stability  
and steerability are improved. If necessary, the  
Antilock Braking System prevents the wheels  
from locking.  
▷
The display illuminates gray when the sys-  
tem is in standby.  
Hill Descent Control can be enabled at speeds  
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Display in the Head-up display  
The status of Hill Descent Control can also be  
shown on the Head-up display.  
Speeds can be set between approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.  
While driving downhill, this system reduces the  
vehicle speed to the set value, as physically  
possible.  
Increasing or decreasing vehicle  
speed  
Hill Descent Control provides assistance when  
driving in selector lever positions D, N, and R.  
Using the rocker button for cruise  
control  
Enabling/disabling Hill Descent  
Control  
To activate/deactivate Hill Descent Control,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
The desired speed for Hill Descent  
Control can be set using the rocker but-  
ton on the left of the steering wheel.  
209  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Press the rocker button up or down to grad-  
ually increase or decrease the set speed.  
fort by reducing the necessary steering ef-  
fort.  
Press the rocker button up/down and hold  
it until the desired speed is reached.  
▷
The wheel angle is reduced in situations  
that require minor or rapid corrections of  
the direction of travel when driving at higher  
speeds, e.g., swerving quickly or correcting  
for crosswinds. In these cases, the variable  
sports steering increases driving stability  
when moving the steering wheel.  
Using the brake pedal  
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the ve-  
hicle speed, the set speed can be decreased  
by depressing the brake pedal.  
Malfunction  
If the Hill Descent Control malfunctions, a  
Check Control message is displayed on the in-  
strument cluster.  
Servotronic  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering  
support.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes parking easier, for example,  
and makes the steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
The steering force is adapted to the drive  
mode to convey a firm, sporty feel or a com-  
fortable steering response.  
Variable sport steering  
The variable sports steering enables direct,  
agile handling with little steering effort. The  
variable sports steering responds independ-  
ently of the current speed, varying the steering  
gear ratio in line with the steering angle.  
▷
In situations that require large movements  
of the steering wheel, e.g., when maneu-  
vering or turning, even minor movements of  
the steering wheel will result in a greater  
wheel steering angle. As a result, the varia-  
ble sports steering increases steering com-  
210  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Applying current speed as the  
speed warning  
To apply the current speed as a Speed Warn-  
ing, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Speed  
warning" / "Adopt current speed".  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Speed Limit Info  
Speed warning  
Speed Limit Info  
Principle  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Speed Limit Info uses a camera near the in-  
terior rearview mirror to detect road signs at  
the edge of the road as well as overhead sign  
posts.  
General information  
Another speed warning is given when the set  
speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-  
ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
Speed Limit Info may also show speed limits  
that apply to routes that are not signposted if  
the navigation system has current map data.  
Activating/deactivating the speed  
warning  
To activate/deactivate the Speed Warning,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Speed  
warning".  
General information  
Traffic signs with subplates are analyzed and  
compared with the vehicle's on-board data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
Adjusting the speed  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
1. To set the speed, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Speed warning".  
For information on the current map version  
and the driver assistance map, see “Driver as-  
sistance map” under “Navigation system”.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with  
speed limitations are detected and displayed  
211  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,  
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed  
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-  
played.  
Display  
Speed Limit Info  
Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed  
when the trailer socket is occupied or trailer  
towing was activated via iDrive.  
Icon  
Description  
Current speed limit.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possible  
to switch between the units of  
measurement.  
Depending on the equipment, an approved  
maximum speed can be set up for trailer tow-  
ing, which will be taken into account for the  
display of speed limits.  
Additional information:  
No data on current speed limit  
available.  
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Speed Limit Info not available.  
▷
Trailer towing, refer to page 313.  
Safety information  
Warning signals  
Warning  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
1. To configure the settings for Speed Limit  
Info, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Speed  
Limit Assistant"  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
212  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Speed control system information is displayed  
on the instrument cluster.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the speed  
control systems include the following individual  
systems:  
▷
Camera, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
Speed Limit Info may be restricted and pro-  
vide incorrect information in the following sit-  
uations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise Control, refer to page 215.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed  
by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 231.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-  
ard.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the individual systems are en-  
hanced with additional functions.  
In areas that are not included in the naviga-  
tion system map data.  
Some functions can be operated via voice con-  
trol.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
Additional information:  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 56.  
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Safety information  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
Warning  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
▷
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Speed control systems  
Principle  
The speed control systems provide assistance  
while driving, for example, by limiting your  
speed, maintaining your distance, or keeping  
your vehicle in its lane.  
These systems are operated using the buttons  
on the steering wheel.  
213  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Icon  
Speed control system  
Cruise control.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Distance control.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control  
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-  
tance with lane keeping.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
automatically  
Store current speed.  
Depending on the system, speed control  
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-  
stance in the following situations:  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Set speed.  
▷
When changing from selector lever position  
D to P, N, or R.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Turning on/selecting speed control  
systems  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
"SPORT PLUS": Upon activating the in-  
creased driving dynamics setting.  
1.  
To activate the speed control sys-  
tem, press the on/off button on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
manually  
Speed control systems can be stopped man-  
ually.  
2.  
To select a different speed control  
system while this system is active, repeat-  
edly press the MODE button on the left of  
the steering wheel until the desired system  
is displayed on the toolbar on the instru-  
ment cluster.  
▷
Press the on/off button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
The system is shown in white when the sys-  
tem can be activated.  
The system is shown in green when it can be  
activated.  
▷
Press the MODE button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
The speed control system has been stopped.  
The system is grayed out if the system has  
failed or if the functional requirements are not  
met.  
214  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
The marking illuminates green when the  
speed control system is active.  
Continuing speed control systems  
To resume the speed control system,  
press the on/off button on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
The mark illuminates gray when the system  
is interrupted.  
No mark is shown when the system is  
turned off.  
The speed control system will resume.  
Switching off speed control systems  
Speed control systems can be switched off  
manually.  
Notifications  
Messages are displayed for some functions in  
addition to the corresponding speed control  
system indicator lights.  
To turn off the speed control system,  
press and hold the on/off button on the  
left side of the steering wheel until the  
indicators go out.  
1. To configure the notification scope, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Notifications".  
The speed control systems have been  
switched off.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Speed control systems switch off automatically  
when drive-ready state is switched off.  
Cruise Control  
Adjusting speed values  
The speeds for the speed control systems can  
be adjusted on the steering wheel.  
Principle  
With the Cruise Control, the buttons on the left  
of the steering wheel can be used to adjust  
your set speed. The system maintains the set  
speed. The system accelerates and brakes au-  
tomatically as needed.  
On the left side of the steering wheel,  
repeatedly press the rocker button up  
or down until the desired value is set.  
▷
▷
Each time the rocker button is pressed  
to the resistance point, the set speed in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Cruise Control information is displayed on the  
instrument cluster.  
Each time the rocker button is pressed past  
the resistance point, the set speed changes  
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
General information  
Cruise control can be activated starting from a  
vehicle speed of 20 mph/30 km/h.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise  
Control settings can change under certain  
conditions. For instance, the acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Marking on speedometer  
A marking for the speed set  
for the speed control system is  
shown on the speedometer.  
215  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Button Function  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Warning  
Set speed.  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
Turning on the Cruise Control  
Cruise Control can be switched on as follows:  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
For vehicles equipped with Distance Control:  
Change the Cruise Control mode to Cruise  
Control without Distance Control.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the system if driving  
at constant speed is possible.  
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the  
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering  
wheel.  
Warning  
1.  
To switch on Cruise Control, press  
the on/off button on the left side of the  
steering wheel.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
2.  
To switch on Cruise Control, press  
the MODE button on the left side of the  
steering wheel repeatedly until Cruise Con-  
trol is selected.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
216  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control activates when cruise control is  
switched on.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
Additional information:  
The maximum speed that can be set depends  
on the vehicle.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Press rocker button to resistance point and  
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates  
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle  
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing  
the switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 213.  
Continuing cruise control  
Adjusting the speed  
At the stored speed  
Store/maintain speed  
The speed can be maintained and stored us-  
ing the buttons on the steering wheel.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Press the rocker button on the left side  
of the steering wheel up or down once  
while the system is stopped.  
When cruise control is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and saved as the desired  
speed.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-  
ter.  
If the Speed Limit Assistant is off, you can also  
save your current speed with the press of a  
button.  
To resume Cruise Control while the  
system is stopped, press the on/off  
button on the left side of the steering  
wheel.  
Press the SET button on the left side of  
the steering wheel.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
Changing the speed  
The speed can be changed with the buttons on  
the steering wheel.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
On the left side of the steering wheel,  
repeatedly press the rocker button up  
or down until the desired speed is set.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
217  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
desired speed in some situations, e.g., when  
driving uphill or downhill.  
At the current speed  
To continue using the cruise control at  
the current speed, press the rocker but-  
ton up or down on the left side of the  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
steering wheel.  
Distance control  
Speed Limit Assistant: at the  
suggested speed  
Principle  
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-  
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to  
the Cruise Control.  
To apply the speed suggested by the  
Speed Limit Assistant to the Cruise  
Control, press the SET button on the  
left of the steering wheel.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
Marking on speedometer  
The marking on the speedometer indicates the  
status of the Cruise Control.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
▷
The mark illuminates green  
when the system is active.  
▷
The mark illuminates gray  
when the system is inter-  
rupted.  
Distance Control is operated using the buttons  
on the left of the steering wheel. The distance  
is set via iDrive.  
▷
No mark is shown when the system is  
turned off.  
Distance Control information is displayed on  
the instrument cluster.  
Indicator light  
General information  
The Cruise Control status is also dis-  
played with the indicator light on the in-  
strument cluster. The indicator light il-  
If the preceding vehicle brakes to a standstill  
and drives off again shortly afterward, Dis-  
tance Control is capable of detecting this as far  
as given conditions allow.  
luminates green when the system is activated.  
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-  
ing the button for the speed setting on the  
steering wheel.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some speed  
control system information can also be dis-  
played on the Head-up display.  
System limits  
Depending on the drive mode or drive power,  
the vehicle may exceed or drop below the set  
218  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Warning  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
Warning  
Overview  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Store current speed.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Set speed.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Sensors  
Distance Control is controlled by the following  
sensors:  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
219  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
Application range  
Distance Control is best when used on well-  
maintained roads.  
Interrupting Cruise Control with  
Distance Control automatically  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is inter-  
rupted automatically in the following situations,  
for example:  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
▷
When selector lever position D is disen-  
gaged.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
"SPORT PLUS": When the setting for en-  
hanced driving dynamics is enabled.  
Turning on Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Switch on Cruise Control with Distance Control  
using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
When the driver’s seat belt and driver’s  
door are opened.  
If the system has not detected objects  
for an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
1.  
To switch on Cruise Control with  
Distance Control, press the on/off button on  
the left side of the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
If the detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
2.  
If necessary, press the MODE but-  
ton on the left side of the steering wheel re-  
peatedly until Distance Control is selected.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
The selected distance to a vehicle driving  
ahead is maintained.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Additional information:  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control activates when Distance Control is  
switched on.  
Speed control systems, refer to page 213.  
Adjusting the speed  
The speed can be set with the buttons on the  
steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
220  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Continuing cruise control while  
driving  
Distance  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
is a risk of accidents and risk of property  
damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic  
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to  
the traffic and weather conditions and main-  
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly  
by braking.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Additional information:  
Adjusting the distance  
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
1. To adjust the distance, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Driving" / "Distance control" / "Distance".  
Continuing cruise control while  
vehicle is stationary  
If the cruise control is stopped, the driver may  
need to confirm their intention to drive off in  
certain situations.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
The displays show the following:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Distance Control can be con-  
figured to automatically adjust the distance to  
the preceding vehicle within the set distance.  
The system analyzes the traffic situation and  
ambient conditions, e.g., poor visibility.  
The mark on the speedometer  
illuminates gray.  
To have the distance adjusted automatically,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Distance control" /  
"Situational distance control".  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Cruise control can be continued as follows:  
▷
Pressing the accelerator pedal.  
▷
Press the rocker button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
▷
Press the SET button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
221  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Icon  
Description  
Safety information  
Indicator light illuminates white:  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
To switch between cruise control with/with-  
out Distance Control, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /  
"Distance control" / "Switch to Cruise Control".  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Distance  
Control displays on the instrument cluster may  
vary.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Assisted View  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, in Assisted View, Distance  
Control information is displayed on the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Marking on speedometer  
The marking on the speedometer indicates the  
status of the Cruise Control.  
▷
The mark illuminates green  
when the system is active.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
▷
The mark illuminates gray  
when the system is inter-  
rupted.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
▷
No mark is shown when the system is  
turned off.  
Set speed  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some speed  
control system information can also be dis-  
played on the Head-up display.  
222  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
Distance information  
The distance information icon appears  
when the distance from the preceding  
vehicle is too short.  
Deceleration  
Distance Control does not decelerate in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control is  
switched off.  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
▷
The view on the Head-up display is se-  
lected.  
For oncoming traffic.  
▷
▷
Distance to preceding vehicle is too short.  
Merging vehicles  
Vehicle speed is greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
Additional information:  
Head-up display, refer to page 133.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Distance Control is subject to the system limits  
of the sensors.  
Distance Control may not be able automati-  
cally restore your chosen distance if a preced-  
ing vehicle suddenly cuts into your lane. It  
may not be possible to restore the selected  
distance in certain situations, including if you  
are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you, the system requests  
that the driver intervene by braking and mak-  
ing an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.  
Detection range  
The vehicle sensors detect the traffic situation  
in their detection range.  
The sensor detection capability and automatic  
braking power are limited.  
223  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
Cornering  
In front of bumps in the road.  
With a heavy trailer.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
Weather  
Under unfavorable weather or light conditions,  
Distance Control may be limited in the follow-  
ing ways:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
When Distance Control is on, if your set speed  
is too high for a bend, your vehicle will be  
slowed slightly in the bend. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Distance Control has a limited detection range.  
Situations can arise in tight curves where a ve-  
hicle driving ahead will not be detected or will  
be detected very late.  
Drive power  
Depending on the drive mode or drive power,  
the vehicle may exceed or drop below the set  
desired speed in some situations, e.g., when  
driving uphill or downhill.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance  
Control with Steering Assistance and lane  
keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-  
ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-  
pose, the system executes supporting steering  
movements, for instance when cornering.  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
Assisted Driving Mode is operated using the  
buttons on the steering wheel.  
Depending on vehicle speed, Assisted Driving  
Mode orients itself using the lane markings or  
preceding vehicles.  
Driving off  
Your vehicle cannot drive off automatically us-  
ing Distance Control in the following situations,  
for example:  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the Driver Attention  
224  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the  
driver's attention.  
Button Function  
Store current speed.  
System information is indicated on the instru-  
ment cluster displays and by the steering  
wheel LEDs.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
If a lane boundary is crossed, the system is-  
sues a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.  
The steering wheel vibration intensity can be  
adjusted.  
Set speed.  
Sensors  
Safety information  
Assisted Driving Mode is controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, via the  
front, side radar sensors.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, via the  
rear, side radar sensors.  
▷
▷
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the Driver Atten-  
tion Camera in the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
▷
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
Assisted Driving Mode:  
Overview  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the  
speed must be below 130 mph/210 km/h or  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The lane is sufficiently wide.  
Hands are on the steering wheel rim.  
The bend radius is sufficiently large.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
The vehicle is driving in the center of the  
lane.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
▷
▷
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Distance Control is active.  
225  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
The seat belt on the driver's side is fas-  
tened.  
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode  
automatically  
Assisted Driving Mode automatically interrupts  
steering support in the following situations, for  
example:  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
The side-collision warning must be active,  
depending on vehicle equipment.  
▷
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, you must set on the control display  
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment: at  
speeds greater than 130 mph/210 km/h or  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.  
With a strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
When the turn signal is switched on or, de-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, when  
the driver turns the steering wheel while the  
turn signal is switched on.  
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode  
1.  
To switch Assisted Driving Mode on,  
press the on/off button on the left side of  
the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
Lane is too narrow.  
If a lane boundary is not detected and there  
is no vehicle driving in front.  
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with Distance Control is  
interrupted.  
2.  
If necessary, press the MODE but-  
ton on the left side of the steering wheel  
until Assisted Driving Mode is selected on  
the instrument cluster toolbar.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-  
tened.  
The indicator light illuminates gray  
when the system is ready and not per-  
forming any steering movement.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
The status of Assisted Driving Mode is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
The indicator light illuminates gray  
when the system is ready and not per-  
forming any steering movement.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
The indicator light illuminates green  
when the system is activated.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
When the system is switched on, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the  
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-  
tive.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
226  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving Mode information is displayed on the  
central display area of the instrument cluster.  
Icon  
Description  
Warning light flashes yellow and  
steering wheel vibrates:  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
A lane boundary has been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates yellow and  
acoustic signal sounds:  
Displays on the steering wheel  
System interruption is imminent.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Similar to the displays for Assisted Driving  
Mode on the instrument cluster, the two LEDs  
above the keypads on the steering wheel illu-  
minate.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Warning light illuminates red, acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
1. To turn the steering wheel displays  
on/off, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback  
via steering wheel" / "Light elements".  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle  
equipment and national-market ver-  
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-  
rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-  
tem interruption is imminent.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Assisted  
Driving Mode information can also be shown  
on the Head-up display.  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steering  
movements.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration  
intensity, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback  
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel  
with your hands and pay attention to  
the surrounding traffic.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-  
era detects that the driver is inattentive.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, in Assisted View, Assisted  
This setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
227  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Weather  
System limits  
With unfavorable weather or light conditions,  
Assisted Driving Mode may be limited as fol-  
lows:  
General information  
Assisted Driving Mode cannot be activated or  
used meaningfully in certain situations, e.g.,  
when towing a trailer.  
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
▷
Short-term interruptions in case of already  
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.  
Safety information  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Lane Change Assistant  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant also performs  
slight steering interventions to assist the driver  
when changing lanes on multilane roads.  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
The Lane Change Assistant is switched on/off  
via iDrive and operated with the turn signal  
lever.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
The following system functions are shown on  
the instrument cluster.  
System limits of the sensors  
Assisted Driving Mode is subject to the system  
limits of the sensors.  
General information  
The Lane Change Assistant uses the Assisted  
Driving Mode sensors.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.  
Safety information  
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.  
Warning  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
228  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Lane Change  
Assistant" / "Lane Change Assistant".  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
2. Start the lane change.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
▷
To change lanes with Lane Change As-  
sistant, press the turn signal lever in the  
desired direction to the resistance point.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment,  
the turn signal lever can also be pressed  
beyond the resistance point.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
the Lane Change Assistant:  
Supporting steering movement in the desired  
direction can be felt a short time later.  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
After the lane change, the system helps keep  
the vehicle in the new lane.  
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without  
pedestrians or cyclists. The road is also  
structurally separated from oncoming traf-  
fic, e.g., guard rails.  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction or by op-  
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.  
▷
A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient  
distance behind your own vehicle since be-  
ginning the drive.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
Vehicle speed is max. approx.  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
Steering wheel icon and lane change  
arrow icon are green:  
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
The system performs a lane change  
in the arrow direction.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, you must set on the control display  
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
Steering wheel icon is green and line  
for lane marking on respective side is  
gray:  
Additional information:  
The system detected the lane change  
request. Lane change not currently  
possible.  
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, in Assisted View, Lane Change  
Assistant information is displayed on the cen-  
tral display area of the instrument cluster.  
Turning the Lane Change Assistant  
on/off  
To turn the Lane Change Assistant on/off,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
229  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
System limits  
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system  
apply.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Additional information:  
Functional requirements  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
The following functional requirements apply for  
lane changes when destination guidance is ac-  
tive:  
Lane change with active  
guidance  
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-  
tivated.  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
Principle  
A situation-dependent minimum speed has  
been reached.  
Lane change with active guidance assists the  
driver when lane changes are necessary to  
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed  
on the instrument cluster. In addition, a slight  
jerk can be felt on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap  
in traffic in the adjacent lane.  
A crossable lane boundary on the side of  
the desired lane change is detected.  
This function is switched on/off via iDrive.  
Destination guidance is active on the navi-  
gation system.  
General information  
When route guidance is active, the Lane  
Change function uses the Assisted Driving  
Mode sensors.  
The function is not available when using  
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or  
Android Auto.  
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
Safety information  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, you must set on the control display  
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
Switching lane change on/off with  
active destination guidance  
To turn the Lane Change Assistant on/off  
while guidance is on, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-  
sisted Driving alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
230  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
"Lane Guiding with Navigation" / "Lane  
Guiding with Navigation".  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Function  
Switching the steering wheel jerk  
on/off  
To enable/disable the steering wheel jerk for  
Lane Change Assistant, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /  
"Lane Guiding with Navigation" / "Steering  
wheel impulse".  
Indicates a necessary lane change.  
The icon varies depending on the  
traffic situation.  
A green checkmark on the icon indi-  
cates that the function is active.  
A red cross on the icon indicates that  
the system cannot assist with the  
lane change.  
Changing lanes  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the traffic situation is displayed  
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.  
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-  
igation destination, a corresponding notice is  
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-  
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering  
wheel.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the  
instrument cluster.  
System limits  
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-  
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems, and  
Driver Attention Camera apply to the lane  
change function with active guidance.  
1.  
The system detects a suitable gap  
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. An  
icon with a green checkmark is displayed  
on the instrument cluster. The system pre-  
pares for the lane change.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.  
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed  
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level  
with the opening.  
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane  
change suggestion.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane  
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into  
the next lane.  
Principle  
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change  
Assistant: Once the Check Control message  
appears, the Lane Change Assistant can be  
started by, e.g., operating the turn signal.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-  
tance with guiding the vehicle in traffic jams on  
select highways.  
The system increases driving comfort in suita-  
ble driving situations.  
5. If necessary, the system automatically  
starts additional lane changes.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
231  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is switched on/off  
via iDrive.  
Overview  
System information is indicated on the instru-  
ment cluster displays and by the steering  
wheel LEDs.  
Sensors  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Safety information  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-  
able in the country in which the vehicle is  
driven.  
Warning  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
This system is only intended for use on  
roads with structural separation from oncom-  
ing traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the  
system limits, the system can also remain ac-  
tive on roads without structural separations  
and may not react as expected. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Deactivate the system if it is enabled on  
roads without structural separations.  
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the  
LED displays on the steering wheel are  
switched on.  
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without  
pedestrians or cyclists. The road is also  
structurally separated from oncoming traf-  
fic, e.g., guard rails.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are detected.  
The lane is sufficiently wide.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
The bend radius is sufficiently large.  
The navigation system must clearly identify  
the road and vehicle position.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
This function must be available on the road  
on which the vehicle is driving.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Do not allow antennas on the roof to be-  
come covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.  
232  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, you must set on the control display  
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
Indicator light is white: System can be  
used.  
▷
▷
A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.  
Vehicle speed must be less than approx.  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
Switching Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus on/off  
To turn Assisted Driving Mode Plus on/off,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Assisted Driving  
Plus" / "Assisted Driving Plus".  
The two LEDs above the keypads on the  
steering wheel illuminate depending on the sit-  
uation.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically  
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active  
and all functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus have been met.  
▷
The LEDs on the steering wheel illuminate  
green when Assisted Driving Mode Plus is  
active.  
▷
The LEDs on the steering wheel illuminate  
yellow when the system is interrupted.  
To activate this function, remove your hands  
from the steering wheel. Remain ready to steer  
and brake at all times.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
▷
The LEDs on the steering wheel illuminate  
red when the system is deactivated.  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
Grab the steering wheel immediately with  
your hands.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is shown in green.  
Additional information:  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
When the system is switched on, the following  
functions are enabled:  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus information can also be  
shown on the Head-up display.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Side collision mitigation.  
233  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the equipment, destination sys-  
tem and national-market version, the value  
can be applied automatically.  
System limits  
The system limits of the following systems ap-  
ply:  
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
Sensors of the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Additional information:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. You can have speeds suggested  
by the Speed Limit Assistant adopted by your  
vehicle's speed control systems.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Speed Limit Assist is switched on/off via iDrive  
and operated using the buttons on the steering  
wheel.  
Suggested speeds can be adjusted by entering  
tolerances.  
The following system functions are shown on  
the instrument cluster.  
Overview  
General information  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
Button Function  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control.  
Distance Control.  
Set speed, refer to page 213.  
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
234  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
Automatic adoption  
on/off  
"Adjust automatically": Distance Control auto-  
matically adopts any detected speed limits  
when driving on roads with barriers separating  
traffic in opposing directions.  
1. To configure the settings for Speed Limit  
Assist, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Speed  
Limit Assistant".  
It may not be possible to use this function  
when driving with a trailer.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
After automatic adoption, the SET but-  
ton on the left side of the steering  
wheel can be pressed to switch back  
to the last value set for desired speed.  
▷
"Adjust automatically": depending on  
the equipment, detected speed limits  
are applied automatically.  
▷
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually to the active speed control system.  
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
When the SET icon is displayed, press  
the SET button on the left side of the  
steering wheel.  
▷
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort  
functions will be turned off.  
Speed adjustment  
Additional information:  
General information  
Speed Limit Assist can be configured to adopt  
the speed limit 1:1 or with a tolerance.  
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 211.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed on the instrument  
cluster when Speed Limit Assist and a speed  
control system are activated.  
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an  
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up  
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
Icon  
Function  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Setting the speed adjustment  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
1. To adjust the speed for Speed Limit As-  
sist, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Speed  
Limit Assistant".  
Indicator light illuminates green: The  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
235  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": Set a tolerance for  
a speed adjustment. This tolerance ap-  
plies to all speed limits.  
▷
▷
Before a curve.  
In front of an exit ramp on highways or  
highway-like roads.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to ": Activate or de-  
activate additional speed adjustment.  
This function is operated via iDrive.  
"Adjust speed limits": First activate ad-  
ditional speed adjustment, then set  
a tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Note the system limits for Speed Limit Info.  
Speed limits cannot be applied automatically  
when using Cruise Control without Distance  
Control.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer hitch,  
the speeds to be adopted are limited to the  
trailer towing speed set on the control display.  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted  
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts  
also apply.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to  
page 213.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 36.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
when adapting vehicle speed to the route:  
Adapting the speed to the  
route  
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-  
tivated.  
Principle  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
The cruise control can be configured to auto-  
matically adjust the vehicle speed to the route  
when Distance Control is active.  
Guidance is activated in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations as necessary:  
The use of navigation software via Apple  
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-  
tional limitations, for instance deviations  
with navigation instructions.  
▷
▷
Before making turns.  
Before a roundabout.  
236  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-  
ited extent to the route ahead in the following  
situations:  
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, you must set on the control display  
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-  
termined by the navigation system.  
▷
On wintry roads.  
Additional information:  
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-  
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed  
Limit Assist systems apply.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
Additional information:  
Adapting speed automatically to  
route  
To activate/deactivate automatic speed ad-  
justment, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Route speed  
control" / "Adjust speed automatically".  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.  
Distance Control, refer to page 218.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.  
Adjusting the cornering speed  
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-  
ing on national-market version.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Route  
speed control" / "Cornering speed".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, in Assisted View, Route-Ahead  
Assistant information is displayed on the cen-  
tral display range of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 147.  
System limits  
Depending on national-market version or the  
country in which the vehicle is currently being  
driven, the Route-Ahead Assistant may not be  
available.  
237  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
▷
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 243.  
Trailer hitch view, refer to page 246.  
Panorama view, rear, refer to page 247.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, additional  
camera views can be used with parking view:  
▷
Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer  
to page 244.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
Automatic camera perspective, refer to  
page 244.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 245.  
Parking assistance systems  
3D view, refer to page 246.  
Car wash view, refer to page 247.  
Panorama view, front, refer to page 247.  
Principle  
With the Park Distance Control display and  
various camera views, the parking assistance  
systems help to park, maneuver, and reverse  
the vehicle. Parking assistance systems are  
operated using the Park Assist key or via the  
Parking menu.  
Activating panorama view using activation  
points, refer to page 248.  
▷
▷
Door opening angle, refer to page 249.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 250.  
The camera-based individual systems are op-  
erated with the function bars on the control  
display. The camera views can be turned on  
and off by selecting the corresponding icon.  
Additional views with parking assistance lines  
or obstacle markings can be shown.  
When parking or reversing, the following indi-  
vidual systems provide active support with as-  
sistance functions and sensors:  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 250.  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 253.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 255.  
Park Assist, refer to page 256.  
Warning  
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 262.  
Remote Control Parking, refer to page 265.  
Reversing Assistant, refer to page 266.  
Trailer Assistant, refer to page 317.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Various camera views and camera perspec-  
tives provide excellent visibility of the vehi-  
cle surroundings while parking and maneuver-  
ing. Depending on vehicle equipment, different  
camera views are available.  
The following camera views can be used with  
the basic version:  
238  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Display  
Button in the vehicle  
Turning display on/off  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view switches  
off automatically when driving forwards or if a  
certain distance or speed is exceeded.  
With reverse gear  
When drive-ready state is on, the parking  
assistance systems display is automatically  
turned on when you engage selector lever po-  
sition R.  
The Park Assist key is located on the  
center console.  
With the Park Assist key  
Sensors  
To turn on the parking assistance sys-  
tem display, press the Park Assist key  
on the center console.  
The parking assistance systems are controlled  
by the following sensors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Via iDrive  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Front camera.  
To turn on the parking assistance systems dis-  
play, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Parking".  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Additional information:  
The instrument cluster shows displays for  
some parking assistance systems such as  
Park Distance Control or Automatic Parking  
Assistant.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
Calling up Park menu  
Some parking assistance systems can be set  
individually in the Park menu.  
1. To bring up the Parking menu, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Parking".  
2. Select the desired settings.  
1
Status of parking assistance systems  
Assisted View  
2
3
Selection menu  
239  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Camera image  
Display on the control display  
Depending on the equipment, one or more  
cameras capture the area from different se-  
lectable perspectives.  
General information  
The parking assistance system view on the  
control display varies depending on vehicle  
equipment and the parking assistance system  
activated.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Depending on the national-market version, ei-  
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-  
era perspective is displayed.  
Assistance view  
Toolbar, left  
Different views and settings can be selected  
using the left toolbar, depending on vehicle  
equipment.  
▷
▷
"Parking View"  
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera  
views or the Park Distance Control view are  
displayed.  
1
Toolbar, left  
"Assist view"  
2
3
4
Camera image  
Vehicle top view  
Toolbar, right  
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-  
played.  
▷
▷
"Panorama view"  
The cross traffic view is displayed.  
"More"  
Parking view  
▷
▷
▷
▷
"3D view"  
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle  
is displayed.  
"Trailer coupling view"  
The view shows the zoom onto the  
trailer hitch.  
"Car wash view"  
Your own lane can be displayed to make  
it easier to drive into a car wash.  
1
Toolbar, left  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image  
"Camera cleaning"  
Selection window  
Automatic camera perspective  
Semi-automatic camera perspective  
Side view  
Cleaning of the front camera and rear-  
view camera can be switched on as  
needed.  
▷
"Settings"  
Settings can be entered in the Park  
menu.  
Toolbar, right  
240  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Toolbar, right  
Icon  
Meaning  
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed  
in the right toolbar.  
White: an available maneuver is se-  
lected but is not being performed.  
Functional requirements have not  
been met or the function transfer is  
complete.  
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.  
Available parking methods of the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.  
Trailer Assistant functions.  
Green: A parking assistance system  
is on. Functions are controlled de-  
pending on the system activated.  
The Maneuver Assistant records  
the maneuver to be saved.  
Additional information in case of malfunc-  
tions.  
Status of parking assistance  
systems  
Additional displays  
General information  
The status of parking assistance systems is  
indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of  
the control display, in the status area on the in-  
strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,  
depending on vehicle equipment. In addition  
to this icon, text also appears on the control  
display.  
Additional views can be shown in the camera  
image for the parking assistance systems dis-  
play, e.g., parking aid lines. This makes park-  
ing and maneuvering easier.  
Several additional displays can be active at the  
same time.  
The following parking assistance systems are  
displayed:  
Turning additional displays on/off  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Maneuver Assistant.  
Back-up Assistant.  
1. To turn additional displays in the camera  
view on/off, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Parking".  
Trailer Assistant.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Icon  
Meaning  
No search for parking assistance  
system offers.  
No other parking assistance sys-  
tems available.  
Parking assistance systems have  
failed.  
Searching for parking assistance  
system offers is active.  
241  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Using parking aid lines  
Parking aid lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads into the boundaries of the  
parking space.  
Pathway lines  
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green  
pathway line covers the corresponding  
turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
The pathway lines help to estimate the re-  
quired space when parking and maneuvering  
on level roads.  
Depending on the engaged gear position, the  
pathway lines are displayed in front of or be-  
hind the vehicle in the camera image on the  
control display.  
The sensors detect obstacles when parking.  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are shown and marked in the camera  
image on the control display.  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in  
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.  
Turning circle lines  
Functional limitations  
The parking assistance systems can only be  
used to a limited extent in the following situa-  
tions:  
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
The turning circle lines show the path with the  
smallest possible turning circle on level roads  
in the camera image on the control display.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
242  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Rearview camera  
Safety information  
Principle  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind  
the vehicle is shown in the camera view on  
the control display. The rearview camera is  
switched on when reversing and can be oper-  
ated via iDrive or the Park Assist key.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Additional displays can be shown on the cam-  
era view, e.g., parking assistance lines and ob-  
stacle markings.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
System limits of the sensors  
Parking assistance systems may be restricted  
by the system limits of the sensors.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the rearview camera:  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.  
▷
▷
The cargo area is fully closed.  
Field of view  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
The camera area is clean and clear.  
Turning the rearview camera on/off  
Detection of objects  
The sensors may not detect very low obstacles  
as well as high, protruding objects, e.g., wall  
ledges.  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
The rearview camera is automatically turned  
on if selector lever position R is engaged while  
drive-ready state is on.  
Objects shown on the control display may be  
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the  
distance to the objects on the control display.  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo, a rear carrier, or a trailer.  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
The malfunctioning camera's detection range  
is shown by the shaded area on the control  
display.  
243  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Turning the semi-automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
1.  
To manually switch on the rearview  
camera press the Park Assist button on the  
center console.  
1.  
To switch on the semi-automatic  
camera perspective, press the Park Assist  
key on the center console.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
2.  
Select the semi-automatic camera per-  
spective icon in the selection window.  
The rearview camera view is switched on.  
To exit the fixed camera view, select another  
camera view in the selection window.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
icon for automatic camera perspective is  
automatically selected in the selection win-  
dow.  
Automatic camera  
perspective  
To exit rearview camera view, select another  
camera view in the selection window or press  
the Park Assist key again.  
Principle  
Deactivated rearview camera  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-  
ing direction. This perspective adapts to the  
respective driving situation.  
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for  
instance when the cargo area is open, the  
camera image is displayed with gray shading.  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front  
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side  
Park Distance Control as necessary.  
Semi-automatic camera  
perspective  
The side Park Distance Control is automati-  
cally displayed when the automatic camera  
perspective is turned on. The function shows  
obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
Principle  
Depending on the parking direction and en-  
gaged selector lever position, the semi-auto-  
matic camera perspective shows a fixed cam-  
era perspective with the areas in front of or  
behind the vehicle.  
You can turn the camera perspective on or off  
using the control display.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
You can turn the camera perspective on or off  
using the control display.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
244  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Turning the automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
Lateral Parking Aid display  
Turning the camera view on/off  
automatically  
When the parking assistance systems' display  
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is  
selected automatically.  
The icon for automatic camera perspective  
is automatically selected in the selection win-  
dow.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,  
select another camera view in the selection  
window.  
Colored obstacle markings warn the driver  
when obstacles have been detected.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic  
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and  
the system uses a semi-automatic camera  
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the  
automatic camera perspective when reverse  
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-  
spective will then be maintained for the current  
parking operation.  
If no obstacle markings are displayed, no ob-  
stacles have been detected.  
Limits of the side protection  
The Lateral Parking Aid only displays station-  
ary obstacles that were previously detected by  
the sensors while passing them.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-  
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the  
display after a certain time. The area next to  
the vehicle must be newly captured.  
1.  
To switch on automatic camera per-  
spective, press the Park Assist button on  
the center console.  
Side view  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
2.  
The icon for automatic camera perspec-  
tive is automatically selected in the selec-  
tion window.  
Principle  
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-  
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,  
select another camera view in the selection  
window or press the Park Assist key again.  
The camera view looks from the rear to the  
front and, if there is a hazard, focuses auto-  
matically on potential obstacles.  
Side view can be turned on or off using the  
control display.  
245  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
2. Go through the menu as follows: "More" /  
"3D view".  
To exit the 3D view, select another camera  
view on the left toolbar.  
Turning the side view on/off  
The selection window lets you choose the side  
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.  
Trailer hitch view  
1.  
To switch on side view, press the  
Park Assist key on the center console.  
Principle  
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can  
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
2.  
Select the camera icon for the desired  
vehicle side in the selection window.  
Trailer hitch view can be turned on or off using  
the control display.  
To exit the side view, select another camera  
view in the selection window.  
General information  
When zooming in, remember that the view  
may no longer show certain obstacles.  
3D view  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Principle  
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the  
vehicle top view in the selection window.  
Turning the trailer hitch view on/off  
Fixed perspectives can be selected directly on  
the circular path in the selection window, or by  
swiping the vehicle in the middle of the camera  
image.  
1.  
To switch on trailer hitch view, press  
the Park Assist key on the center console.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
The current perspective is marked with a cam-  
era icon on the circular path.  
2. Go through the menu as follows: "More" /  
"Trailer coupling view".  
3D view can be turned on or off using the con-  
trol display.  
To exit the trailer hitch view, select another  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the 3D view on/off  
1.  
To switch on 3D view, press the  
Park Assist key on the center console.  
246  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
To exit the car wash view, select a different  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
Display  
Display  
Two static circle segments are displayed in the  
camera image. These circle segments help to  
estimate the distance of the trailer to the trailer  
hitch.  
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving  
into a car wash.  
A docking line dependent on the steering-  
wheel angle helps with aiming for the trailer  
with the trailer hitch.  
This view can be used to position the vehicle  
correctly within the washing system guide rails.  
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll  
freely forward.  
Car wash view  
Additional information:  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to  
page 123.  
Principle  
The car wash view assists when entering a car  
wash.  
Panorama View  
This function can be turned on or off on the  
control display.  
Principle  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view  
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and  
intersections.  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected  
relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-  
vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-  
pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-  
era cover the side of the vehicle.  
Turning the car wash view on/off  
1.  
To switch on the car wash view,  
press the Park Assist key on the center  
console.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this function  
can be used when reversing or driving forward.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
Panorama view can be turned on or off using  
the control display.  
2. Go through the menu as follows: "More" /  
"Car wash view".  
247  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this function  
can be activated automatically by saving acti-  
vation points.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing  
camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-  
hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-  
played when forward gear is engaged.  
General information  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-  
ble for distance estimations.  
Automatic activation of  
panorama view  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Principle  
Positions at which panorama view should  
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-  
vation points.  
Sensors  
Panorama view is controlled by the following  
sensors:  
Up to ten activation points can be saved and  
edited.  
▷
▷
Rearview camera.  
Depending on if vehicle is equipped with  
front camera.  
The activation points can be used when driv-  
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-  
ket version, when reversing.  
Turning the panoramic view on/off  
General information  
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance  
systems chapter.  
1.  
To turn on panorama view, press  
the Park Assist key on the center console.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
automatic activation of panorama view:  
2. Bring up the following menu via iDrive:  
"Panorama view".  
▷
▷
A GPS signal must be received.  
To exit panorama view, select another camera  
view on the left toolbar.  
Depending on national-market version: You  
must activate a BMW ID or driver profile.  
Display  
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera  
must be installed.  
The direction of travel, the selector lever  
position, and the vehicle angle must match  
a stored activation point.  
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the  
bumpers of your own vehicle.  
248  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
To edit an activation point, press and  
hold the desired activation point.  
Storing activation points  
Desired activation points can be saved.  
To delete an activation point, swipe over  
the desired activation point.  
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you  
want panorama view to switch on automat-  
ically, then stop.  
Door opening angle  
2.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
center console.  
Principle  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door  
opening angle display is shown automatically  
when stationary.  
3. Go through the menu as follows:  
"Panorama view" / "Activation point" /  
"Save activation point".  
This display helps estimate how far the doors  
can be opened when parking.  
Activation points are saved with the following  
information, for example:  
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking  
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.  
With the city/town and the street.  
A default name.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
You can rename the location and street infor-  
mation created automatically.  
Display  
Using activation points  
To enable/disable the use of activation points,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Parking" / "GPS-based".  
Editing activation points  
Activation points can be renamed or deleted,  
individually or collectively.  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P.  
1.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
center console.  
System limits  
The door opening angle view does not warn  
you of approaching road users.  
Parking assistance systems displays are  
shown on the control display.  
2. Go through the menu as follows:  
"Panorama view" / "Manage points".  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the  
display for technical reasons.  
A list of all saved activation points is dis-  
played.  
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the  
control display does not overlap with any other  
249  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to  
other objects.  
▷
▷
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
BMW ID, refer to page 67.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
control display.  
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D  
View  
Remote 3D View can be activated or deacti-  
vated individually or together with other func-  
tions.  
Remote 3D View  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Data privacy".  
Principle  
The My BMW App and camera views in park-  
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-  
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-  
roundings on a mobile device.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
After activation, Remote 3D View can be  
accessed using the My BMW App.  
Remote 3D View shows a snapshot of the sit-  
uation.  
System limits  
Remote 3D View may not be fully operational  
or may not be available in the following situa-  
tions:  
General information  
For reasons of data protection, Remote  
3D View can only be used three times within  
two hours.  
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark  
fields in the display indicate areas that are  
not recorded by the system.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
Sensors  
Remote 3D View is controlled by the following  
sensors:  
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-  
tion.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Park Distance Control  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
Remote 3D View:  
Principle  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Data transfer must be activated.  
The My BMW App must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-  
sonic sensors can also be reported.  
▷
In ConnectedDrive countries, you must acti-  
vate a BMW ID with an existing Connected-  
Drive account.  
The range of Park Distance Control, depending  
on obstacles and environmental conditions, is  
approx. 6 ft/2 m.  
Additional information:  
250  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Park Distance Control turns on and off auto-  
matically in certain situations: You can enable  
or disable automatic activation on the control  
display.  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
Park Distance Control switches on automati-  
cally in the following situations:  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is engaged.  
▷
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
Safety information  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
To activate/deactivate automatic activation  
when obstacles are detected, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Parking" / "Automatic PDC activation".  
Turning off the system automatically  
Park Distance Control switches off automati-  
cally when driving forward or if a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Warning  
To manually switch on Park Distance  
Control, press the Park Assist button  
on the center console.  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
When the LED illuminates, the system is on.  
When the LED goes out, the system is off.  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system cannot be turned off manually when  
the reverse gear is engaged.  
Sensors  
Park Distance Control is controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
General information  
An intermittent tone is given as acoustic warn-  
ing for Park Distance Control to signal an ap-  
proaching object. E.g., when an object is de-  
251  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
tected at the rear left of the vehicle, a sound is  
heard from the rear left speaker.  
When the Park Distance Control is switched  
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically  
switched on again.  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.  
Visual warning  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
General information  
The approach to an object is displayed on the  
control display and instrument cluster as soon  
as Park Distance Control is activated.  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
Objects that are farther away are already dis-  
played before a signal sounds.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning  
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown  
for a better estimation of the space required.  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound between the front  
and rear speakers.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-  
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings  
indicate when obstacles are detected within  
the detection range.  
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone  
are turned off when selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the Cross Traf-  
fic Warning, a warning is also shown on the  
display for vehicles approaching from the side  
at the rear and front.  
Depending on national-market version, the in-  
termittent tones are switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Adjusting the volume  
Display  
1. To adjust the volume of the acoustic warn-  
ing, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "PDC  
signal volume".  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-  
hind the vehicle.  
2. Set the desired value.  
Depending on national-market  
version: Turn off acoustic warning  
Depending on national-market version, the  
acoustic warning can be turned off while per-  
forming a parking maneuver.  
Press the acoustic warning icon in the sta-  
tus field at the top of the control display.  
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-  
cle.  
252  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
rear functions of Park Distance Control remain  
switched on when trailer towing is enabled.  
The trailer towing icon is shown on the  
control display.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 315.  
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-  
cle.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Unwarranted warnings may be given if the  
system limits of Park Distance Control are  
reached.  
The gray shaded areas indicate the sensor  
detection range. No obstacles have been de-  
tected within detection range.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
Colored markings in the shaded area indicate  
that obstacles have been detected within the  
detection range.  
If the shaded area is not continuous, the area  
next to the vehicle has not been scanned yet.  
Malfunction  
If Park Distance Control malfunctions,  
the Attention icon appears on the con-  
trol display.  
System limits  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range may not be shown on the con-  
trol display.  
The function for protecting the vehicle sides  
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-  
viously detected by the sensors when passing  
by.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control has failed. Have the ve-  
hicle checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Park Distance Control does not detect when  
an obstacle moves later. When the vehicle is  
stationary, the gray shaded areas on the sides  
are hidden after a certain time. The area on  
the side of the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Principle  
Trailer towing  
Active Park Distance Control is the brake func-  
tion of Park Distance Control and initiates  
emergency braking in the event of an acute  
risk of collision.  
The rear functions of Park Distance Control are  
turned off when towing a trailer or when the  
trailer socket is occupied.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded area  
on the control display.  
The system can be used below walking speed  
when reversing or coasting backward.  
Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.  
253  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Rearview camera.  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not  
performed.  
Driving off after emergency braking  
Active Park Distance Control can be tempora-  
rily deactivated on the control display, where  
you can also change the settings for this sys-  
tem.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
Safety information  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
After emergency braking, Active Park Distance  
Control can be temporarily deactivated on the  
control display. A corresponding message is  
displayed.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Go through the menu as follows: "Configure" /  
"Deactivate temporarily".  
No further emergency braking will be per-  
formed in this situation as you continue driving.  
The function is automatically reactivated when  
Park Distance Control is switched on again.  
Settings  
You can configure which areas of your vehicle  
to protect with the Park Distance Control sys-  
tem.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not  
use the driver assistance system while tow-  
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Active  
PDC emergency braking".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Display  
Sensors  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
Active Park Distance Control is controlled by  
the following sensors:  
254  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Safety information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Functional limitations  
Active Park Distance Control cannot be used in  
the following situations, for example:  
▷
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the  
vehicle speed, emergency braking is deacti-  
vated.  
▷
When driving with a trailer.  
If applicable, turn off the system temporarily, if  
needed.  
Warning  
Additional information:  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not  
use the driver assistance system while tow-  
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
Hill Descent Control, refer to page 209.  
Drive-off monitoring  
Principle  
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-  
itoring reduces the drive power when driving  
off.  
Sensors  
Drive-off monitoring is controlled by the follow-  
ing sensors:  
When obstacles are detected in close range in  
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-  
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual  
braking.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-  
cle, the system will brake.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
drive-off monitoring:  
Drive-Off Monitoring can be activated/deacti-  
vated on the control display.  
You can cancel reduced acceleration, e.g., by  
pressing the accelerator twice.  
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-  
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.  
255  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,  
nearly to the end point.  
Functional limitation  
Drive-off monitoring is deactivated when the  
trailer power socket is occupied or trailer tow-  
ing is activated, e.g., when using a trailer or  
rear bicycle rack.  
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-  
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-  
tion and obstacle detection.  
Activating/deactivating Drive-Off  
Monitoring  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
To activate/deactivate Drive-Off Monitoring,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Drive off  
monitoring".  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support  
when parallel parking and parking transverse  
to the road.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
In addition, the system makes it easier to  
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking  
spaces.  
Depending on national-market version, this  
system turns on automatically for the next  
drive.  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
Canceling reduced drive power  
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in  
the following situations:  
The system calculates the best possible park-  
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,  
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.  
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.  
After the accelerator pedal has been de-  
pressed completely twice.  
The operating principle and operation of Park  
Assist is divided into the following steps:  
▷
A specific distance has been traveled.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by  
covering a certain distance, the drive power is  
released gradually.  
Parking.  
Driving out of parking spaces.  
Display  
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-  
formed automatically.  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,  
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it  
reaches a position where it can be driven out  
of the parking space without further steering  
movements.  
System limits  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the  
parking space to enable continued driving in  
the desired direction.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
256  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
A parking maneuver can be interrupted and  
continued manually.  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Settings can be customized as desired, e.g., to  
adjust how parking maneuvers are displayed  
or to set a sound for suitable parking spaces.  
Warning  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
increases the comfort and range of uses of  
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to  
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking  
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are  
marked with lines is possible. The parking ma-  
neuver can also be performed using Remote  
Control Parking on a smartphone.  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not  
use the driver assistance system while tow-  
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Parking methods  
Park Assist supports the following functions:  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
When parallel parking: Parking in reverse, par-  
allel to the road.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
257  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
When perpendicular parking: Parking forward  
or in reverse, perpendicular to the road.  
With Park Assist Professional: Parking in car  
parks with parking lines.  
Sensors  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
is additionally controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
Measurement of parking spaces  
The following functional requirements apply  
when measuring parking spaces:  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces.  
▷
Driving forward: up to approx.  
22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
The following functional requirements apply for  
suitable parking spaces:  
Longitudinal parking:  
258  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-  
ches/15 cm.  
Minimum length of gap between two  
objects: vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
Displays  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
General information  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
The current status of parking assistance sys-  
tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on  
the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up  
display, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Minimum width of gap: vehicle width plus  
approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
The minimum depth corresponds to your  
vehicle's length.  
Different icons are shown on the control dis-  
play for selecting the parking method.  
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces  
must be estimated by the driver. Due to  
technical limitations, the system is only able  
to approximate the depth of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-  
sponds to the prioritized parking option.  
The direction of the arrow changes for the  
icons for parking methods for driving out of a  
parking space.  
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:  
Icon  
Meaning  
▷
The parking space must be clearly marked  
with lines.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.  
Reverse perpendicular parking.  
Forward perpendicular parking.  
▷
The one-time calibration of the camera af-  
ter vehicle delivery must be complete. Drive  
a few kilometers in daylight to do so.  
Parking operation  
The following functional requirements apply  
when pulling into a parking space:  
Turning parking operation display  
on/off  
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-  
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the  
camera image on the control display.  
▷
▷
The doors and cargo area are closed.  
The driver’s seat belt is fastened.  
Leaving parking spaces  
The following functional requirements apply  
when pulling out of a parking space:  
To turn the parking maneuver display on/  
off, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Parking" / "Show assistance  
information".  
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has  
been detected in the area around the vehi-  
cle.  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
To turn the signal tone for suitable parking  
spaces on/off, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-  
verse, and objects have been detected in  
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The  
259  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Sound when  
available".  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
When parking with Park Assist, you must se-  
lect a parking method depending on the avail-  
able parking spaces.  
Driving out of a parking space using  
the Automatic Parking Assistant  
1. Switch on drive-ready state to pull out of  
the parking space using Park Assist.  
1. For the parking space search when driving  
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to  
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of  
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
2.  
When your vehicle is stationary,  
press the Park Assist key on the center  
console or engage reverse gear.  
The parking space search is activated  
and displayed on the instrument cluster.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
2.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
center console or engage reverse gear.  
3. On the control display: Select the desired  
parking method.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
On the instrument cluster, select the sug-  
gested parking method using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display and in the instrument  
cluster.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
3. On the control display: Select one of the  
parking methods offered. You can switch to  
another parking maneuver as necessary.  
The status symbol for the Automatic  
Parking Assistant illuminates green. The  
system takes control of the maneuver.  
On the instrument cluster, select the sug-  
gested parking method using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
A message will be displayed at the end of  
the maneuver.  
The status symbol for the Automatic  
Parking Assistant illuminates green. The  
system takes control of the parking opera-  
tion.  
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of parking space and driving off  
as usual.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned  
off automatically.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-  
celed manually at any time, e.g.:  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for  
Park Distance Control.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
260  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
When the system is automatically aborted, se-  
lector lever position P is engaged.  
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
Continuing the parking operation  
If parking or leaving a parking space has been  
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if  
needed.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled  
without engaging selector lever position P.  
Driving can continue immediately.  
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
Park Assist is canceled automatically in situa-  
tions such as the following:  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When setting the parking brake.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
With open cargo area.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With open hood.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
When towing a trailer.  
With the doors open.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking  
spaces that are only marked with lines on  
the ground. The system orients itself ac-  
cording to objects.  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
Functional limitations  
Park Assist may be restricted in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
With insufficient distances, which are indi-  
cated by Park Distance Control.  
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
261  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be  
operational. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Safety information  
Maneuver Assistant  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Principle  
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for  
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.  
Parking and maneuvering operations can be  
recorded and then carried out automatically by  
the system.  
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and  
thereby recorded.  
When the vehicle reaches the activation area  
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-  
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-  
trol display or in the instrument cluster.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not  
use the driver assistance system while tow-  
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
After the activation, the system takes control  
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver  
automatically.  
In addition, the parking maneuver can be per-  
formed using Remote Control Parking on a  
smartphone.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
262  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Warning  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
Functional requirement  
To use the Maneuver Assistant, the one-off  
calibration process of the camera after vehicle  
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilome-  
ters in daylight to do so.  
Detection range  
Recording maneuver  
General information  
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-  
ent locations.  
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-  
corded.  
Identical maneuvers under different ambient  
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-  
tions.  
The detection range for a maneuver is divided  
into the following areas:  
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-  
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.  
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will  
begin with the localization in the back-  
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m  
around the distance covered of a stored  
maneuver.  
In total, a distance covered of approx.  
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible  
maneuvers can be recorded.  
▷
▷
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-  
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,  
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the  
control display.  
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less  
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.  
Recording maneuver  
1. To record a maneuver, drive the vehicle to  
the desired starting point and stop.  
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored  
maneuver on the control display can be ac-  
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.  
After the activation, the system takes con-  
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-  
neuver automatically.  
2.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
center console.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Sensors  
3. Select the following function via iDrive:  
"Record new path".  
The Maneuver Assistant is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-  
tion.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
263  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
"Recording active": The maneuver is re-  
corded.  
▷
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
When recording a route, do not drive faster  
than 9 mph/15 km/h.  
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
While recording, the distance covered will  
be displayed.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
When the maximum distance covered or  
the maximum speed is reached, a message  
will be displayed and a signal tone will  
sound.  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without  
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can  
continue immediately.  
5. When the vehicle is stationary, select the  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
automatically  
following function via iDrive:  
recording".  
"Save  
The maneuver can be saved with an auto-  
matically generated name, or renamed or  
discarded.  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
6. Select the desired action.  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
Performing stored maneuver  
1. To perform the stored maneuver, drive the  
vehicle into the activation area and stop.  
The control display and instrument cluster  
indicate that a stored maneuver can be ac-  
tivated.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.  
With open cargo area.  
With open hood.  
With the doors open.  
2.  
Press the icon to select the stored ma-  
neuver.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
The status symbol for the Maneuver  
Assistant illuminates green. After the acti-  
vation, the system takes control of the vehi-  
cle and carries out the maneuver automat-  
ically. If applicable, follow the instructions  
on the control display or in the instrument  
cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors and cameras are reached.  
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
In case of obstacles.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
With trailer towing.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
manually  
The vehicle can be controlled manually during  
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-  
tions:  
In the event of an automatic cancellation of  
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a  
complete stop and selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
264  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if  
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
If the calibration process for the cam-  
era is not completed after vehicle deliv-  
ery, an icon appears on the display of  
the parking assistance systems when reverse  
gear is engaged.  
Editing stored maneuvers  
Maneuvers can be deleted or renamed via  
iDrive, individually or collectively.  
Tap the icon and follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Recorded  
paths".  
Remote Control Parking  
Principle  
2. Select the maneuver to be edited.  
3. Select the desired action.  
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can  
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-  
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park  
Assist Professional.  
System limits  
The maneuver is performed independently,  
without you having to be inside the vehicle, us-  
ing a smartphone and the My BMW App. This  
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,  
the vehicle's parking position can be corrected  
by maneuvering manually with the My BMW  
App.  
Functional limitations  
The Maneuver Assistant does not provide sup-  
port when towing a trailer.  
A maneuver that has already been started can  
be continued at any time with Remote Control  
Parking.  
System limits can cause functional limitations  
such as in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
Vehicle features and options  
In case of recorded maneuvers where the  
system minimum distance to objects can-  
not be maintained.  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the distance covered, for in-  
stance other tires or changed ambient con-  
ditions like light conditions or weather.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-  
neuvers when driving into the activation  
area.  
In multi-story parking garages, for record-  
ings at different parking levels, or for re-  
cordings that run over several parking lev-  
els.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
265  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Note the information in the Automatic Parking  
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.  
Parking with Remote Control  
Parking  
1. To perform the parking maneuver with Re-  
mote Control Parking, engage selector lever  
position P.  
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized  
use.  
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and  
cargo area.  
The low-beam headlights are switched on for  
the duration of the maneuver.  
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My  
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-  
ward, or select the desired parking method.  
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist  
Professional is only available for Remote Con-  
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the  
vehicle.  
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.  
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are  
present.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
Remote Control Parking:  
Depending on the option selected in the My  
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at  
the end of the parking maneuver or you can  
take control of the vehicle again.  
▷
▷
▷
All occupants have left the vehicle.  
The doors and cargo area are closed.  
Make sure that no one is located within  
range of the maneuver.  
System limits  
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-  
tooth connection transmission due to external  
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-  
rupted.  
▷
Make sure that no one is located in the nar-  
row spaces between the vehicle and sta-  
tionary objects, e.g., between the vehicle  
and a garage wall.  
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is  
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive  
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not  
be available. Follow the instructions in the My  
BMW App.  
▷
To manually correct the vehicle position on  
the My BMW App, the minimum width of  
the parking space must be the vehicle width  
plus 1.9 ft/0.6 m.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with Re-  
mote Control Parking.  
It may not be easy to maneuver into a parking  
space. This function is offered on the My BMW  
app but cannot be used due to ambient condi-  
tions.  
The My BMW App must be installed on a  
compatible smartphone.  
The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
Back-up assistant  
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-  
phone.  
Principle  
The distance between vehicle and smart-  
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.  
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,  
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-  
ing or road situations.  
A valid digital key must be set up for the  
vehicle, then recognized without issue.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.  
266  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-  
ing.  
Warning  
The Reversing Assistant takes control of steer-  
ing. The driver must control the speed using  
the accelerator and brake pedals.  
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance  
system cannot react correctly because the  
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not  
use the driver assistance system while tow-  
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,  
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.  
With Back-up Assistant: a maximum distance  
of 164 ft/50 m is saved.  
With Back-up Assistant Professional: a maxi-  
mum distance of 656 ft/200 m is saved.  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the Reversing Assistant:  
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
▷
No trailer towing.  
Back-up Assistant Professional: sufficiently  
bright light conditions on the saved route.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-  
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: The one-  
off calibration of the camera after vehicle  
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilo-  
meters in daylight to do so.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
267  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Bring up the following menu via iDrive:  
"Cancel".  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. To reverse with automatic steering, switch  
on drive-ready state.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
center console.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The Reversing Assistant is canceled automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
2.  
When your vehicle is stationary,  
press the Park Assist key on the center  
console or engage reverse gear.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
3. Bring up the following menu via iDrive:  
"Start back-up Assistant".  
When shifting from reverse gear to another  
selector lever position.  
The length of the distance covered is dis-  
played on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
If applicable, follow the instructions on the  
control display or in the instrument cluster.  
When exiting the stored lane when revers-  
ing, for instance with maximum steering-  
wheel angle.  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-  
tor pedal and the brake.  
▷
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
The status symbol for the Back-up As-  
sistant illuminates green. The system takes  
over the steering.  
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-  
cle's surroundings.  
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied  
or when trailer towing is activated.  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
▷
▷
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
5. Right before the end of the stored distance  
covered, a signal tone will sound and a  
message is displayed.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor  
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164  
ft/50 m.  
Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to forward gear.  
System limits  
Speed threshold  
The maximum speed when reversing is limited  
to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the func-  
tion is interrupted.  
268  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Functional limitations  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.  
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the route, for instance other  
tires or changed ambient conditions like  
weather.  
▷
Light conditions changed for Back-up As-  
sistant Professional.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
269  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain  
and chassis" / "IconicSounds".  
Vehicle features and options  
2. Select the desired setting.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Adaptive suspension  
The adaptive suspension is a variable, me-  
chanically controlled sport suspension that re-  
duces movement of the vehicle body while  
driving with a sporty style or on uneven roads.  
Driving dynamics and driving comfort are in-  
creased through the adjustment of the chassis.  
Adaptive M chassis  
The Adaptive M suspension is a variable, me-  
chanically controlled sports suspension that  
reduces movement of the vehicle body while  
driving with a sporty style or on uneven roads,  
and is thus designed to be sporty.  
Driving dynamics and driving comfort are in-  
creased through the adjustment of the chassis.  
BMW IconicSounds  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be  
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.  
1. To configure BMW IconicSounds, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
270  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Air recirculation mode.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
Additional information:  
Fresh air.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Climate control  
SYNC program.  
Seat heating.  
Overview  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Some climate control functions, e.g., seat heat-  
ing or air flow, can be configured using the  
Climate Comfort menu on the control display.  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Icon  
Function  
Turn the climate control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
The defrost function and rear window heat-  
ing can be turned on/off using the instrument  
panel.  
271  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning the air conditioning system  
on/off  
The climate control system can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
Icon  
Function  
Defrost function.  
Rear window defroster.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Rear automatic climate control  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
Icon  
Function  
The entire climate control system is turned on  
or off with the last settings applied.  
Automatic program.  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can be  
turned off.  
Temperature.  
Air distribution.  
Seat heating.  
Settings  
You can configure individual settings for cli-  
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:  
▷
▷
Seat heating intensity.  
Pre-ventilation.  
1.  
To configure the climate control  
functions individually, select the icon for the  
Climate Control menu on the menu bar.  
Calling up climate control functions  
Access the Climate menu via iDrive:  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
Or:  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Climate control".  
Turning rear automatic climate  
control on/off  
To display the menu bar with temperature set-  
tings in full screen mode, for example, when  
using third-party apps, swipe up from the  
lower edge of the control display.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.  
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.  
272  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Via iDrive  
Seat heating.  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
General information  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
The automatic program takes seat occupancy  
into account, regulating the climate in an en-  
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-  
cupants.  
3. "Rear climate control"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
The rear automatic climate control can be ac-  
tivated with standard setting for temperature  
and AUTO program:  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the automatic program in order to prevent  
window condensation to the extent possible.  
"Reset settings at the end of the trip"  
Locking the rear automatic climate  
control  
Overview  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Rear climate control"  
4. "Lock rear climate control"  
1
Air flow intensity  
Climate control functions bar  
Settings  
2
3
4
5
Automatic program  
Temperature  
Principle  
Seat heating  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Steering wheel heating  
Active seat ventilation  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates, and  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior temperature,  
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-  
perature setting:  
▷
▷
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
273  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
Each level has a specific control range of the  
intensity.  
The AUTO program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive.  
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-  
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is  
not necessary to manually change the desired  
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Custom settings for climate control functions  
are saved and applied automatically, e.g., after  
the vehicle is started.  
2.  
Tap the automatic program button.  
Switching the rear climate control  
automatic program on/off  
Temperature  
Via iDrive  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Setting the temperature  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Rear climate control"  
4. "Automatic climate"  
Select the desired setting.  
Via rear climate control display  
Tap the button.  
You can set the desired temperature for driver  
and front passenger individually on the menu  
bar.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-  
ally.  
▷
▷
Increase the temperature.  
Reduce the temperature.  
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Individual settings"  
274  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.  
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.  
Setting the rear automatic climate  
control temperature  
Via iDrive  
Air distribution settings  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Principle  
In manual mode, the air distribution can be  
adjusted as needed.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Rear climate control"  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:  
4. Set the desired temperature.  
Via rear climate control display  
Set the desired temperature:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow into the footwell, ar-  
row 1.  
Air flow  
Aim the air flow toward the upper body  
area, arrow 2.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield, ar-  
row 3.  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be set via iDrive.  
1.  
Tap the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Adjusting the air distribution of the  
rear climate control  
2.  
Select the desired setting.  
Automatic program:  
Tap the icon on the rear climate control  
display to set the desired air distribu-  
tion.  
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the  
air flow.  
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air  
flow.  
Manual mode:  
275  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
Maximum cooling can be used when the out-  
side temperature exceeds approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃  
and when drive-ready state is on.  
Air conditioning  
Principle  
With the climate control function, the air inside  
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then  
warmed again depending on the temperature  
settings.  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via  
iDrive:  
Functional requirement  
The climate control function can be used with  
standby or drive-ready state.  
1. Select the Climate menu icon on the menu  
bar.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
Switching the cooling function on/off  
The air conditioning can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. Open the vents.  
Air recirculation mode  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Principle  
With air recirculation, if unpleasant odors or  
pollutants are detected in the outside air, the  
outside air supply can be temporarily stopped.  
The system then recirculates the interior air.  
2.  
Tap the climate control function but-  
ton.  
In recirculated-air mode, the air conditioning  
is automatically turned on to dry the air and  
avoid window condensation.  
With automatic air recirculation, outside air is  
fed in, or the interior air is recirculated, de-  
pending on the outside air quality.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
When air recirculation is off, outside air is chan-  
neled into the interior.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
Maximum cooling  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off the air  
recirculation.  
Principle  
Maximum cooling is used to cool the vehicle  
interior quickly and effectively.  
The lowest temperature and the maximum air  
flow are set automatically.  
276  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or  
off via iDrive:  
General information  
The following settings can be applied:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
Automatic program.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2. The current operating mode is displayed on  
the climate control functions bar. Tap the  
button until the desired operating mode is  
set.  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
The SYNC program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.  
Fresh air.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
Automatic air recirculation.  
If the settings for the front passenger's side or  
rear are changed, the SYNC program turns off  
automatically.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-  
culation turns off automatically after some time  
based on the ambient conditions in order to  
prevent condensation.  
Defrost function  
SYNC program  
Principle  
With the defrost function, ice and condensation  
are quickly removed from the windshield and  
the front side windows.  
Principle  
If the SYNC program is activated, the settings  
for the driver's side are transferred to the pas-  
senger's side and to the rear.  
The air flow and air temperature are automati-  
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-  
densation.  
For improved comfort, when the SYNC pro-  
gram is deactivated, the following settings are  
adjusted automatically in the automatic pro-  
gram depending on seat occupancy:  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
If there is window condensation, turn on the  
automatic program to take advantage of the  
condensation sensor.  
▷
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,  
the settings for the driver's side are applied  
to the front passenger side.  
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear  
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-  
vide maximum performance.  
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the  
default settings for the rear are applied.  
When the seat is occupied again, the most re-  
cent settings are reapplied.  
277  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
General information  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
To activate or deactivate the defrost  
function, press the defrost button on  
the instrument panel.  
The LED of the button is illuminated when the  
system is switched on.  
Adjusting seat heating  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-  
shield and front side windows.  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As  
you drive, the heater output is automatically  
adjusted according to your set intensity.  
Rear window defroster  
Principle  
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-  
densation are quickly removed from the rear  
window.  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Functional requirement  
The rear window heating can be used when  
standby or drive-ready state is on.  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
To turn the rear window heating on/off,  
press the rear window heating button  
on the instrument panel.  
1. Select the icon for seat climate control on  
the menu bar, arrow 1.  
The LED illuminates when the rear window  
heating is turned on.  
2.  
Tap the seat heating button repeat-  
edly until the desired level is selected, ar-  
row 2.  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
Seat heating  
Turning the rear automatic climate  
control seat heating on/off  
Principle  
When the seat heating is used, seats are  
heated depending on the outside temperature  
and the interior temperature.  
Tap the icon on the rear climate control  
display to set the desired heating out-  
put level.  
The intensity can be stored using the auto-  
matic program. This function can be adjusted  
as necessary.  
278  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The intensity can be stored using the auto-  
matic program. This function can be adjusted  
as necessary.  
Active seat ventilation  
Principle  
The system cools the seat and backrest as  
necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat tempera-  
ture.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-  
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-  
matically adjusted according to your set inten-  
sity.  
Adjusting active seat ventilation  
Automatic program  
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity  
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you  
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted  
according to the set intensity.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Adjusting active seat ventilation  
manually  
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:  
1. Select the icon for seat climate control on  
the menu bar, arrow 1.  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
2.  
Tap the steering wheel heating but-  
ton repeatedly until the desired level is se-  
lected, arrow 2.  
2.  
Press the seat ventilation button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
Steering wheel heating  
Ventilation  
Principle  
Principle  
When the steering wheel heating is used, the  
steering wheel is heated depending on the  
outside temperature and the interior tempera-  
ture.  
The ventilation system has different options for  
direct or indirect ventilation to optimize air flow  
in the vehicle.  
279  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-  
ing on the set desired temperature.  
Air quality  
General information  
The following components improve the air  
quality inside the vehicle:  
Front ventilation  
▷
▷
▷
Emissions-tested vehicle interior.  
Interior filter.  
Air conditioning system to control the tem-  
perature, air flow, and air recirculation.  
▷
Pre-ventilation.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
▷
▷
Adjust the air flow from the vent, arrows 1.  
Change the air flow direction, arrows 2.  
Ventilation in the rear  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
▷
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrow 1.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Pre-ventilation  
Principle  
Setting the ventilation  
Pre-ventilation is used to cool or heat the vehi-  
cle interior before beginning a drive. The vehi-  
cle interior is ventilated or heated as necessary  
using residual engine heat, depending on the  
set temperature and ambient temperature.  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the  
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-  
sengers.  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective air conditioning.  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
The activation time is determined based on  
the outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure  
time.  
280  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will  
be switched on before the set departure  
time.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
pre-ventilation:  
▷
▷
Set the departure time.  
Activate departure times.  
Allow for at least 10 minutes between setting  
and activating the departure time and depart-  
ing at the planned time. This gives the air con-  
ditioning sufficient time to prepare the vehicle  
interior.  
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehi-  
cle battery. System can be used again once  
engine is started or after a short drive.  
Setting the departure time  
The departure time can be set via iDrive:  
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Switching pre-ventilation on/off  
Pre-cooling can be switched on or off via  
iDrive:  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. "Departure plan"  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
5. Select the desired departure time.  
6. Set the desired departure time.  
7. Select the day of the week, as necessary.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
Activating the departure time  
The departure time can be activated via iDrive:  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Departure time  
1.  
Tap the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Principle  
Different departure times can be set to ensure  
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-  
cle at the time of departure:  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
The system is switched on once.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: Time and  
day of week can be set.  
281  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on  
pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas  
with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed  
garages.  
Display on the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Icon illuminates: a  
departure time is acti-  
vated.  
Warning  
Icon flashes: pre-ven-  
tilation is switched  
on.  
When pre-conditioning is in operation, high  
temperatures can occur underneath the  
body, for instance caused by the exhaust  
system. If combustible materials such as  
leaves or grass come in contact with hot  
parts of the exhaust system, these materials  
can ignite. There is a risk of fire, injury, and  
property damage. Make sure that no com-  
bustible materials can come in contact with  
hot vehicle parts during pre-conditioning, e.g.  
leaves, grass, natural gas, gasoline, oil or  
other combustible objects.  
Activation on the My BMW app  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW  
App with remote functionality can be used to  
turn on precooling at a preset departure time  
or immediately.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
pre-conditioning:  
Principle  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle in-  
terior to a comfortable temperature prior to  
departure. This system automatically cools,  
ventilates, and heats depending on the in-  
side/outside temperature and set temperature.  
Snow and ice may be removed more easily.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
The battery is sufficiently charged.  
The tank capacity is sufficient.  
The hood is closed.  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
Safety information  
Enabling the automatic engine start  
function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-  
gine cannot switch on automatically to air-con-  
dition the vehicle interior.  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation  
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-  
lute the area in and around the vehicle or  
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases  
contain pollutants which are colorless and  
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-  
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
282  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Automatic engine start can be enabled via  
iDrive:  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
After operating the vehicle key, it takes  
approx. 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
To turn off pre-conditioning, press the button  
again three times within 1 second.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
Turning off with the Start/Stop button  
Pre-conditioning can be turned off directly  
by pushing the Start/Stop button without de-  
pressing the brake pedal.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Remote Engine Start"  
5. "Start engine for climate control"  
6. Confirm the legal disclaimer.  
Air conditioning for departure time  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
Principle  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-  
ture:  
General information  
The pre-conditioning turns off automatically  
after max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.  
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
The pre-conditioning can only be activated  
twice in a row.  
Pre-conditioning is turned on once.  
Pre-conditioning can be used again as soon as  
drive-ready state is activated and then deacti-  
vated again.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: Time and  
day of week for the scheduled departure  
can be set.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
Switching on via iDrive  
▷
▷
Set the departure time.  
Activate departure times.  
Pre-conditioning can be switched on or off via  
iDrive:  
Pre-conditioning activates automatically a few  
minutes before the set departure time. Pre-  
conditioning stays on for a short time after the  
set departure time.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can  
only be activated once for the departure time.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Start now"  
Pre-conditioning can be used again as soon as  
drive-ready state is activated and then deacti-  
vated again.  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
Pre-conditioning can be turned on/off using  
the vehicle key.  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.  
283  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Setting the departure time  
The departure time can be set via iDrive:  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
Activation of the pre-conditioning is confirmed  
by the light flashing twice.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
The parking light turns on while the pre-condi-  
tioning is on.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select the day of the week, as necessary.  
Activating the departure time  
The departure time can be activated via iDrive:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display  
The activated pre-conditioning  
temperature is displayed on the  
instrument cluster.  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-condition-  
ing. The vehicle is not ready to drive.  
Icon  
Description  
Icon on the instrument  
panel.  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
Icon flashes: pre-condi-  
tioning is switched on.  
284  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
risk of property damage. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Compatibility  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions for the  
remote-controlled system, the system  
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-  
versal remote control.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Additional questions are answered by:  
Principle  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The integrated universal remote control in the  
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled  
systems such as garage door openers, alarm  
systems or locking systems.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
For any additional questions, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
The integrated universal remote control re-  
places up to three different hand-held trans-  
mitters. To operate the remote control, the  
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-  
grammed with the desired functions.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
The operating elements on the interior mirror  
consist of the following elements:  
Before selling the vehicle, delete any saved  
functions for security purposes.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the  
remote-controlled system near metal objects  
to ensure the best possible operation.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and  
285  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
The required distance depends on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:  
▷
The LED illuminates green when the  
programming is complete.  
Hand-held transmitter for remote-control-  
led system, arrow 3.  
Release the button.  
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly when the  
hand-held transmitter was detected but  
the programming is not complete.  
Programming the integrated  
universal remote control  
Press and hold the button on the interior  
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform  
this procedure three times.  
Functional requirement  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for rolling code  
radio systems.  
Programming individual buttons  
1. To program individual buttons, park the ve-  
hicle within range of the remote-controlled  
system.  
▷
The LED does not illuminate green after  
60 seconds if the programming could  
not be completed.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5.  
2. Activate standby state.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
3. Select desired button on interior mirror:  
▷
Program an available button:  
Press the button.  
▷
Program a button that is already in use:  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
20 seconds.  
Refer to information on synchronization in the  
operating instructions for the remote-control-  
led system.  
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly  
begin flashing orange.  
1. Program the desired button on the interior  
mirror.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the  
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to  
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons  
on the interior mirror.  
2. Locate and press the synchronize button  
on the remote-controlled system, e.g., a  
garage door.  
286  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next  
step.  
Glare shield from the side  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a  
second person.  
Folding the sun visor out  
To prevent glare from the side window, pro-  
ceed as follows:  
3. Press and hold the programmed button on  
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.  
1. Fold down the sun visor.  
If necessary, repeat this step up to three  
times in order to end synchronization. Once  
synchronization is complete, the program-  
med function will be carried out.  
2. Detach the sun visor from its mount and  
swing it toward the side window.  
Folding the sun visor in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Operation  
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-  
tem can be operated with the button on the  
interior mirror.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover.  
Press and hold the desired button for the re-  
mote-controlled system within range until the  
function is started.  
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously  
illuminated green during the transmission of  
the radio signal.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Deleting a button assignment  
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-  
vidually.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green  
rapidly.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
All stored button assignments will be deleted.  
Sun visor  
Safety information  
Glare shield  
Warning  
To protect against glare, fold the sun visor up  
or down.  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Make sure that devices  
287  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
In the cargo area  
Warning  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the  
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V  
electrical system. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only connect  
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the  
jump-start terminals in the engine compart-  
ment.  
A socket is provided on the right side of the  
cargo area under a cover. Open the cover be-  
fore using the socket.  
Warning  
USB port  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Principle  
The USB port is an interface used to connect  
mobile devices to the vehicle via USB cable.  
When connected, data can be sent or the mo-  
bile device can be charged.  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
Front center armrest  
Additional information:  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-  
igation, Entertainment, Communication;  
Safety information  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
A socket is provided in the front center armrest  
under a cover. Pull off the cover before using  
the socket.  
288  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
BMW Travel & Comfort  
System  
Front center console  
Principle  
The BMW Travel & Comfort system provides  
mounts for special accessories, e.g., universal  
holders for tablets or clothes hangers. The  
BMW Travel & Comfort system is located on  
the front seat backrests.  
For more information, contact an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Two USB ports are located on the front center  
console.  
Overview  
These USB ports have the following character-  
istics:  
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices and for data  
transfer.  
▷
▷
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
The mounts are located on the front seat back-  
rests, behind the marked covers.  
Rear center console  
Installing optional accessories  
1. To attach optional accessories, push the  
cover on the front seat backrest all the way  
to the side.  
Two USB ports are located in the rear center  
console.  
These USB ports have the following character-  
istics:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
2. When installing optional accessories, refer  
to the assembly instructions.  
289  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Wireless charging tray  
Principle  
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly  
charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
General information  
Quick charging functions are supported de-  
pending on the smartphone.  
1
Storage area  
Fan  
2
The integrated fan cools the smartphone being  
charged.  
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,  
make sure that there is nothing between the  
smartphone to be charged and the wireless  
charging tray.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the wireless charging tray:  
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-  
certified.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
The charging function is on.  
Safety information  
The smartphone cannot exceed maximum  
dimensions of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x  
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. When charging  
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-  
jects on the tray together with the device.  
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
Place the smartphone to be charged up-  
right in the center of the tray on the driver's  
side. The smartphone display is facing up.  
Activating/deactivating charging  
To activate/deactivate charging, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"System settings" / "Wireless charging tray" /  
"Wireless charging".  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
Inserting a smartphone  
Place the smartphone upright in the middle of  
the tray on the driver's side, with the display  
facing up.  
290  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Forgotten warning  
Interior camera  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
Principle  
The interior camera can be used to record the  
vehicle interior.  
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,  
the recording function and, if necessary, data  
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm  
the query on the control display. Additional  
activation may be required for some system  
functions.  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
To activate/deactivate the Forgotten Warning,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Wireless  
charging tray" / "Mobile phone reminder".  
Two infrared light sources next to the camera  
lens illuminate while the interior camera is ac-  
tive. Infrared light sources may be visible, de-  
pending on lighting conditions.  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
The interior camera can provide the following  
functions:  
▷
Interior camera.  
Media can be recorded, saved, and played.  
Remote Inside View.  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray  
and smartphone.  
▷
The vehicle interior can be recorded using  
the My BMW App.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
▷
Anti-theft recorder.  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are  
located between the smartphone and wire-  
less charging tray.  
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle  
interior is automatically recorded. Record-  
ings can also be played using the My BMW  
App.  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Follow applicable legal requirements when us-  
ing this system.  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
Data protection  
General information  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
The permissibility of making and evaluating re-  
cordings for the interior camera depends on  
the applicable regulations of the country in  
which the system is to be used. The user is  
responsible for the use of the system and com-  
pliance with the respective regulations.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions  
given on the control display and smart-  
phone, as applicable.  
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory  
restrictions on using the system in your region  
291  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the  
laws with respect to use of the system should  
be verified in regular intervals, especially when  
borders are frequently crossed.  
This system analyzes the vehicle interior to  
detect which seats are occupied. No media re-  
cordings are made in the process.  
Overview  
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must  
be informed about the system. In addition, in-  
formation about the system is required when  
handing off the vehicle.  
Data transfer and data storage  
Whether recording data will be sent or stored  
depends on the recording function.  
The following applies for the interior camera  
function:  
The interior camera is located in the headliner.  
Additional information:  
▷
Data is sent to a mobile device. It must be  
possible to connect to the vehicle over Wi-  
Fi.  
Around the headliner, refer to page 35.  
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and assigned  
to the BMW ID or driver profile.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply for  
the interior camera function:  
The following applies for Remote Inside View:  
▷
Data is sent to mobile devices via the My  
BMW App. A connection to the Connected-  
Drive account is required.  
▷
▷
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
The camera is activated.  
▷
Data is saved to the My BMW App and,  
after data is sent, to the mobile device.  
When sending recordings to mobile devices,  
the following functional requirements apply:  
The following applies for the Anti-Theft Re-  
corder:  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
A mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
via Wi-Fi.  
▷
Data is sent to mobile devices via the My  
BMW App. A connection to the Connected-  
Drive account is required.  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Remote Inside View and Anti-Theft Re-  
corder functions:  
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and, after data  
is sent, to the mobile device.  
▷
▷
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
More information on the scope and content of  
data processing is available online in the Con-  
nectedDrive privacy notices or service descrip-  
tions.  
The My BMW App is installed on the mobile  
device.  
▷
The My BMW App is linked to the Connect-  
edDrive account.  
Occupying the seats  
The interior camera is also used to detect oc-  
cupied seats.  
▷
▷
The vehicle is parked and locked.  
The Anti-Theft Recorder can only be used if  
vehicle is equipped with an alarm system.  
The interior camera turns on automatically at  
regular intervals when all doors are closed.  
292  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible  
and are not partially or completely covered, for  
instance by face masks.  
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be  
displayed as a preview.  
Recording video  
Additional information:  
Videos can be recorded as follows:  
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Camera".  
Activating/deactivating interior  
camera  
The interior camera can record and send data  
when activated, then be deactivated.  
2. Select the recording mode for video record-  
ing.  
3. Start the video recording.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Settings".  
You can only record video for a certain time.  
Displaying and managing  
recordings  
Saved recordings can be played, sent, and de-  
leted in the vehicle.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Interior camera  
Recording mode  
With some national-market versions, record-  
ings are only shown on the control display  
when the vehicle speed is less than approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h for safety reasons.  
Recording  
mode  
Function  
"Single  
photo"  
Shortly after triggering, a  
photo will be taken.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Gallery".  
"Smile"  
When the system detects a  
smile, a picture will be taken.  
2. Select the desired recording.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Scan the QR code shown on the control dis-  
play to send recordings to a mobile device.  
The recording is transferred when the pop-up  
on the mobile device is opened. The mobile  
device must be connected to the vehicle via  
WLAN.  
"Self-timer  
(3 sec.)"  
After the timer has expired, a  
photo will be taken.  
"Burst  
mode"  
Shortly after triggering, a ser-  
ies of pictures will be taken.  
Take picture  
Settings  
A photo can be taken as follows:  
1. To configure the settings for the interior  
camera, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /  
"Settings".  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Camera".  
2. Select the desired recording mode.  
3. Trigger a photo.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on the recording mode selected,  
photos are taken shortly after being triggered,  
when a smile is detected, or when the timer  
elapses.  
Remote Inside View  
With Remote Inside View, recordings of the ve-  
hicle interior can be played on a mobile device  
293  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
using the My BMW App. The vehicle interior  
can be checked, e.g., for forgotten items.  
The function is not suitable for monitoring peo-  
ple or animals left behind.  
Anti-theft recorder  
The Anti-Theft Recorder automatically records  
the vehicle interior when the alarm system is  
triggered. The My BMW App issues a notifica-  
tion when recordings are being taken. The re-  
cording can be shown on a mobile device.  
Up to three recordings can be saved to the  
vehicle and synchronized with the My BMW  
App. If the vehicle is reset to factory settings,  
recordings saved to the vehicle are deleted.  
294  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip  
pads.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Storage compartments  
Principle  
Glove compartment  
The vehicle has various options for storing or  
stowing objects, e.g., the glove compartment  
or door storage compartments.  
Overview  
The glove compartment is located at the bot-  
tom of the instrument panel on the front pas-  
senger's side.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Opening the glove compartment  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Warning  
Press the button on the glove compartment.  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
Closing the glove compartment  
To close the glove compartment, press the  
glove compartment lid down until it engages.  
295  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with  
an integrated key. This prevents access to the  
glove compartment.  
Front center armrest  
Overview  
A storage compartment is provided in the cen-  
ter armrest between the seats.  
After the glove compartment has been locked,  
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-  
out the integrated key, for example, when the  
car is being parked by a parking attendant.  
Opening the center armrest  
To open the center armrest, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 74.  
1. Press the button on the center armrest, ar-  
row.  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
Safety information  
Warning  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-  
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Do not use any breakable  
objects while driving. Only stow breakable  
objects in closed storage compartments.  
2. Open the center armrest lid.  
Closing the center armrest  
To close the center armrest, press the center  
armrest lid down until it engages.  
Front cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Overview  
The storage compartments are located in the  
doors.  
Storage tray in center  
console  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of property  
damage. Do not force objects into the cup  
The storage compartments are located in the  
center console.  
Additional information:  
Wireless charging tray, refer to page 290.  
296  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
holder. Make sure that drink containers are  
Overview  
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do  
not transport hot beverages.  
Overview  
Two cup holders are provided in the rear cen-  
ter armrest.  
Coat hooks  
Safety information  
Warning  
The front center console includes two cup  
holders.  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. When  
suspending clothing articles from the coat  
hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the  
driver's view.  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of property  
damage. Do not force objects into the cup  
holder. Make sure that drink containers are  
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do  
not transport hot beverages.  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-  
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,  
from the coat hooks.  
Overview  
The coat hooks are located on the rear grab  
handles in the headliner.  
297  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Stow and secure objects  
and cargo properly.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
Principle  
When loading the vehicle, items and cargo  
must be stowed and secured properly. Do not  
exceed the permissible weights and loads.  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of property damage. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
and property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs).  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
298  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
▷
▷
Larger, heavy cargo: Secure with cargo  
straps.  
Stow particularly heavy cargo as far for-  
ward as possible, directly behind and below  
the rear seat backrests. When the rear seat  
is not occupied, secure each of the outer  
seat belts in the opposite buckle.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
Payload  
Principle  
Lashing eyes are devices used to secure  
loads. Depending on vehicle equipment, two  
lashing eyes are provided in the cargo area.  
General information  
To secure cargo, attach suitable devices, e.g.,  
lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps,  
or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes.  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
Overview  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
To stow and secure cargo, note the following:  
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area,  
on the side panels and rear panel.  
If stowing sufficiently large items in the  
cargo area, fold down the rear seat back-  
rests completely.  
▷
▷
Fasten straps, etc. for securing the load to  
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Multifunction hook  
Small, light-weight cargo: Secure with ten-  
sioning/draw straps or with a cargo net.  
Principle  
Light-weight objects can be hung on the multi-  
function hooks in the cargo area.  
299  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
General information  
The cargo cover and partition net can be  
stowed away.  
Warning  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-  
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Only hang lightweight objects from the multi-  
function hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo  
area must be properly secured.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Improper use of the cargo area floor can lead  
to a risk of objects flying about during braking  
and evasive maneuvers, for example. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
▷
Do not use the cargo area floor to sepa-  
rate the cargo area and vehicle interior  
in the sense of a luggage net.  
Overview  
▷
Only use the cargo area floor in the  
folded-up position when the rear seat  
backrests are folded up and locked.  
▷
▷
Fold down the cargo area floor before  
driving off.  
Always secure cargo against slipping,  
using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for  
instance.  
A multifunction hook is provided on the right  
side of the cargo area.  
Fold down the multifunction hook until it audi-  
bly engages in the lower position.  
NOTICE  
The storage space under the cargo area floor  
is only suitable for soft objects. Hard objects  
may result in damage to the vehicle electrical  
system in the event of an accident. There is  
a risk of property damage. Only stow soft ob-  
jects under the cargo area floor.  
Net  
Depending on vehicle equipment, a net is pro-  
vided on the left or right side of the cargo area.  
Smaller items can be stored in the net. To  
transport larger objects, slide the net down.  
Cargo floor panel  
Principle  
To stow cargo, a storage compartment is pro-  
vided under the cargo area floor. The cargo  
area floor can be opened.  
300  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Opening the storage compartment  
Fold up the cargo floor panel  
The cargo area floor can be folded up as fol-  
lows:  
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel  
forward.  
2. Fold up the cargo area floor if it has been  
folded forward.  
To open the storage compartment, use the  
handle to pull the cargo area floor upward and  
fold it forward.  
Closing the storage compartment  
Fold the cargo area floor back and push it  
down.  
3. Fold out the cargo area floor holder in order  
to hold the cargo area floor in the folded-up  
position.  
Do not place any weight on the cargo area  
floor when folded up. Before folding the cargo  
area floor down, fold in the holder.  
Enlarging the cargo area  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding  
down the rear seat backrests.  
General information  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of  
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and  
301  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
the center section can be folded down sepa-  
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded  
down together with the center section.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts  
jammed when folding down the rear seat  
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the rear seat backrest including  
head restraint is clear when folding down.  
Pull the lever in the recess and fold the rear  
seat backrest forward.  
Folding back the backrest  
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-  
tion and engage it.  
Warning  
Folding down the center section  
To fold down the center section, proceed as  
follows:  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Pull down the sliding button to the right of the  
head restraint and fold the center section for-  
ward.  
Cargo cover  
Principle  
The cargo cover separates the cargo area from  
the seat rows and is used to secure cargo. The  
cargo cover can be removed.  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
To fold in the rear seat backrests, proceed as  
follows:  
302  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Using the handle, hold the cargo cover firmly  
and slowly guide it straight forward. The cargo  
cover is retracted.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Closing the cargo cover  
Warning  
To close the cargo cover, slowly pull the cargo  
cover out and straight forward, arrow 1, and  
hook it to the holders on both sides, arrows 2.  
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be  
thrown about the car's interior such as in the  
event of an accident or a braking or evasive  
maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure the cargo cover  
is securely engaged in the brackets.  
Removing the cargo cover  
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug-  
gage.  
Warning  
Body parts can become trapped when the  
folding cargo cover is operated. There is a  
risk of injury. When operating the folding  
cargo cover, make sure that the travel path  
of the cover is clear.  
Warning  
To remove the cargo cover, press the release  
button, arrow 1, and pull the cargo cover out  
toward the rear, arrow 2.  
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can  
jam body parts or cause damage. There is a  
risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do  
not let the cargo cover snap back into place.  
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage  
compartment under the cargo floor panel.  
Inserting the cargo cover  
To insert the cargo cover, proceed as follows:  
Opening the cargo cover  
To open the cargo cover, use the handle to pull  
the cargo cover back and unhook it from the  
holders on both sides.  
1. Place the cargo cover on one side of the  
side trim panel.  
2. Slide the other side forward into the mounts  
on the side trim panel.  
303  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
The cargo cover should engage audibly.  
The cargo cover is correctly engaged when  
the red marking on the release button is no  
longer visible.  
3. Repeat this process for the other side of the  
cargo cover.  
Stowing the cargo cover  
The cargo cover can be stowed under the  
cargo floor panel.  
1. Fold the cargo area floor forward.  
2. Slide the cargo cover under the right side  
trim panel and place it in the storage com-  
partment.  
3. Fold the cargo area floor back and push it  
down.  
304  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
305  

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
BMW iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Personal settings
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Light and view
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Parking
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

First Generation (1995-2006) Ford Galaxy Van First Generation (1995-2006) Ford Galaxy Van
Second Generation (2013-2023) Ford Ecosport SUV Second Generation (2013-2023) Ford Ecosport SUV
Fifth Generation (2012-2020) Ford Explorer SUV Fifth Generation (2012-2020) Ford Explorer SUV
Third Generation (2016-2021) Ford Ka 2 Door Third Generation (2016-2021) Ford Ka 2 Door
Second Generation (2009-2016) Ford Ka 2 Door Second Generation (2009-2016) Ford Ka 2 Door
First Generation (1996-2008) Ford Ka 2 Door First Generation (1996-2008) Ford Ka 2 Door